Preface Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1 SIMATIC SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2 Automation Systems S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4 Certificates A Standards and licenses B Service & support C Manual 11/2015 A5E00172008-12 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E00172008-12 06/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved Preface Purpose of the manual This manual will help you to plan, install, and operate a SIMATIC S7 ex module for an automation system in a hazardous area. Basic knowledge required General knowledge of automation engineering is required to understand this manual. You should be familiar with the fundamentals of explosion protection, with the identification of explosion-protected equipment and with the regulations regarding explosion protection. Validity of the manual This manual is valid for all the SIMATIC S7 ex modules listed by order number in the following table. Table 1 S7-300 I/O modules SIMATIC S7 ex module Order number SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD 6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA 6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA 6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0 For information on CPUs or IM 153-x versions which support this module, refer to the STEP 7 Hardware Catalog. Changes since the previous edition of the manual The section below outlines the changes this manual contains compared to the previous version: The HART analog modules 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0 and 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0 have been added. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 3 Preface Position in the information scheme Depending on the application, you will need the following documentation to understand this manual: S7-300: Hardware and Installation, CPU data, module specifications and instruction list ET 200M: Distributed I/O device Distributed I/O Devices S7-300, M7-300, ET 200M: Manual Guide The manual covers the following subject areas: At the beginning of this manual you will find a complete table of contents. Chapter 1 explains the mechanical configuration of an automation system with SIMATIC S7 Ex modules Chapter 2 describes the SIMATIC S7 Ex digital modules Chapter 3 describes the SIMATIC S7 Ex analog modules Chapter 4 describes the SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules Important terms are explained in the glossary. You can use the index to find the key parts of the manual. Approvals See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249) CE marking See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249) Mark for Australia (C-Tick-Mark) See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249) Standards See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249) Recycling and disposal You can recycle the Ex I/O modules because they are made of low-toxicity materials. To recycle and disposal of your old device in an environmentally friendly way, please contact a company certified to deal with electronic waste. 4 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Preface Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http:// www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http:// support.automation.siemens.com). S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 5 Preface 6 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Table of contents Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3 1 2 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules..................................11 1.1 Use.........................................................................................................................................11 1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications..........................................................................11 1.3 The LK 393 line chamber.......................................................................................................14 1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules...................................................................17 1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules................................................................20 1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems..........................................................21 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.7.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems.........................................................................................24 General information................................................................................................................24 Marking of Cables and Lines of Intrinsically Safe Circuits.....................................................26 Wiring and Cabling in Cable Bedding Made of Metal or in Conduits.....................................26 Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14..........................................................................27 Selecting the cables and wires in accordance with EN 60079-14..........................................28 Types of cables......................................................................................................................29 Requirements of Terminals for Intrinsically Safe Type of Protection.....................................32 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage.................................................33 Shielding................................................................................................................................33 Equipment Shielding..............................................................................................................33 Line Shielding.........................................................................................................................34 Measures to Counteract Interference Voltages......................................................................36 The Most Important Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC...............................................................38 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5 1.9.6 1.9.7 1.9.8 Lightning Protection...............................................................................................................39 Measures...............................................................................................................................39 External Lightning Protection/Shielding of Buildings..............................................................40 Creating distributed systems with S7-300 and ET 200M.......................................................40 Shielding of Cables and Buildings..........................................................................................41 Equipotential bonding for lightning protection........................................................................41 Overvoltage Protection...........................................................................................................42 Example of Lightning and Overvoltage Protection.................................................................43 Lightning Strike......................................................................................................................45 1.10 1.10.1 1.10.2 1.10.3 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas....................................................................................45 Safety Measures....................................................................................................................45 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 2..........................................................................47 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 1..........................................................................47 1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus......................................................................................50 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules.................................................................................................................53 2.1 Chapter overview...................................................................................................................53 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)................................53 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 7 Table of contents 3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Features and technical specifications....................................................................................53 Parameterization....................................................................................................................59 Diagnostic messages.............................................................................................................61 Interrupts................................................................................................................................64 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0).......................66 Features and technical specifications....................................................................................66 Parameterization....................................................................................................................72 Diagnostic messages.............................................................................................................74 Interrupts................................................................................................................................76 2.4 2.4.1 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0).......................77 Features and technical specifications....................................................................................77 2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules............................................................84 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules................................................................................................................87 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 8 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.1.7 3.1.8 3.1.9 3.1.10 3.1.11 3.1.12 3.1.13 3.1.14 3.1.15 3.1.16 3.1.17 3.1.18 3.1.19 3.1.20 Analog value representation..................................................................................................87 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input and Output Values........................................87 General information about the display of analog values within the measuring ranges of analog inputs..........................................................................................................................87 Analog value notation of the voltage measurement ranges...................................................89 Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges...................................................89 Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders..............................90 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range..........................................91 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Ni 100..............................92 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range ...........................................92 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Ni 100................................93 Analog value representation for the temperature range type B.............................................94 Analog value representation for the temperature range type E.............................................95 Analog value representation for the temperature range type J..............................................96 Analog value representation for the temperature range type K.............................................96 Analog value representation for the temperature range type L..............................................97 Analog value representation for the temperature range type N.............................................98 Analog value representation for the temperature range type R.............................................99 Analog value representation for the temperature range type S.............................................99 Representation of the analog values of the temperature range type T................................100 Analog value representation for the temperature range type U...........................................101 Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs............................102 3.2 General information on wiring technology............................................................................102 3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs.....................................................................................103 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD.......................106 3.5 Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors.....................111 3.6 Using thermocouples...........................................................................................................112 3.7 Connecting voltage sensors.................................................................................................115 3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA.....................................................................................................................115 3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA....117 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules............................................................118 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Table of contents 3.10.1 3.10.2 4 3.10.3 3.10.4 3.10.5 3.10.6 3.10.7 Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog Input Channels........................................................118 Conversion, Cycle, Transient Recovery and Response Times of Analog Output Channels..............................................................................................................................119 Parameters of Analog Modules............................................................................................120 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules......................................................................................124 Interrupts of analog modules................................................................................................128 Characteristics of Analog Modules.......................................................................................130 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex analog modules........................................................132 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)........................135 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)........................146 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)....................154 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules........................................................................................................161 4.1 Using HART analog modules...............................................................................................161 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 Introduction to HART............................................................................................................163 Definition of HART...............................................................................................................163 HART functions....................................................................................................................164 Application of HART.............................................................................................................166 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation.............................................................................168 Example configuration..........................................................................................................168 Setting Up the HART Analog Module and Field Devices.....................................................169 Operating Phase of the HART Analog Module and Field Devices.......................................170 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.6.1 4.4.6.2 4.4.6.3 4.4.6.4 4.4.6.5 4.4.6.6 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5.....................................................................................171 Parameters of HART Analog Modules.................................................................................171 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules..................................................................174 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules..............................................................................175 HART analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0) ....176 HART analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0)....183 Data record interface............................................................................................................189 Parameter Data Records.....................................................................................................190 Diagnostic data records.......................................................................................................192 HART Communication Data Records..................................................................................194 Additional diagnostic data records.......................................................................................198 Additional parameter data records.......................................................................................200 User data interface...............................................................................................................201 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7.....................................................................................203 Configuring HART variables.................................................................................................204 Parameters of HART Analog Modules.................................................................................206 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules..................................................................209 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules..............................................................................215 HART Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0)....215 HART Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0)......................................................................................................223 Data record interface............................................................................................................229 Parameter Data Records.....................................................................................................231 Diagnostic data records.......................................................................................................234 HART communication and information data records...........................................................236 Example of HART programming..........................................................................................241 User data interface...............................................................................................................243 4.5.7 4.5.7.1 4.5.7.2 4.5.7.3 4.5.7.4 4.5.7.5 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 9 Table of contents A Certificates................................................................................................................................................247 A.1 B Standards and licenses............................................................................................................................249 B.1 C Overview of diagnostic functions..........................................................................................247 Standards and licenses........................................................................................................249 Service & support.....................................................................................................................................255 C.1 Service & support.................................................................................................................255 Glossary...................................................................................................................................................257 Index.........................................................................................................................................................269 10 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.1 1 Use Overview The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules can be used in the systems: S7-300, ET 200M. The HART analog modules SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART and SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART can be used in the ET 200M system. For installation purposes, you must therefore comply with the configuration guidelines as specified in the corresponding manuals. In addition, further reference guidelines for SIMATIC S7 Ex modules are provided in this section. These must be taken into consideration. 1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications Note Note Ex systems may only be installed by authorized personnel. Approvals The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules have the following approval II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc. This means they can be installed in a nonhazardous area and also in zone 2 (category 3G) if certain conditions are adhered to. Only intrinsically safe electrical equipment (actuators/sensors) permitted in zones 1 and 2 can be connected to the SIMATIC S7 Ex modules. The approval applies to all potentially explosive gas mixtures in Groups IIC. The safety-related limits can be found in the certificates of conformity. The certificates of conformity and explanations of the designations can be found on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200). S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 11 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications FM approval The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules have the following FM approvals: Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx Therefore, the modules can be used in areas that contain volatile flammable liquids or flammable gasses which are normally within closed vessels or systems, from which they can only escape under abnormal operating or fault conditions. The approval applies to all test gasses. A surface temperature no greater than 135 C (T4) occurs at ambient temperatures of 60 C. Safe extra low voltage SIMATIC S7 Ex modules must be operated with a "safe functional extra low voltage". The module may thus only be subject to a fault voltage of U < 60 V. You can find more detailed information on the safe extra low voltage in, for example, the data sheets for the power supplies to be used. All system components which can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill this condition. This includes in particular: the power supply module PS307. It fulfills this condition. the MPI interface. It fulfills this condition when all users operate with safe extra low voltage. SIMATIC automation systems and programming units also fulfill this condition. 115/230 V modules. Even if they are used in another cell or in another programmable controller they must feature safe extra low voltage on the system side (i.e. towards the backplane bus). Any other current circuit (24 VDC) integrated in the system must be operated with ESLV. Refer to the corresponding data sheets or consult the manufacturer. Note that the I/O modules also support the connection of sensors and actuators with auxiliary power supply. Also ensure a safe extra low voltage is used in this case. The voltage level of the process signal at a 24 V digital module may never reach a fault voltage Um > 60V. This also applies to non-intrinsically safe components. Note All power sources such as the internal or external 24 VDC load voltage supplies and the 5 V bus voltage must be appropriately interconnected galvanically, so that voltage addition as a result of potential differences is not liable to generate a fault voltage which exceeds Um. You can achieve this state, for example, by referencing all power sources of the system to functional ground. Also refer to the instructions provided in the relevant manuals (see Foreword) for this purpose. The maximum possible fault voltage Um in the system is 60V. Minimum thread measure A minimum thread measure of 50 mm must be maintained between connections with safe functional extra low voltage and intrinsically safe connections. The process connector features a cable chamber in order to meet this requirement. 12 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications Certain module components may prevent you from maintaining this thread measure. In this case, you should install a DM 370 dummy module, and set it up so that it does not use any address space. If you use the ET 200M Distributed I/O, you should observe the information regarding the configuration. Also take care with regard to the wiring to ensure this specified spacing is maintained between intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe connections. Combined use of Ex and non-Ex I/O modules Combined use is possible, however, the minimum thread measure between conductive parts of Ex and non-Ex modules must be maintained in all cases. As a rule, you must install a DM 370 spacer module between Ex and non-Ex modules. Always separate the intrinsically safe from the non-intrinsically safe wiring. They must be routed in separate cable ducts. A mixed operation is therefore not recommended. Partition The Ex partition must be fitted to achieve the minimum thread measure of 50 mm between Ex and non-Ex modules when using the bus module of the active backplane bus. Load current circuit Power is supplied to the Ex sensors and actuators (to 4-wire transducers, for example) either from the Ex modules, or via separate, intrinsically safe power supply modules. The Ex I/O modules receive their power supply via the backplane bus. The 24VDC load voltage input of the front connector is required for the power supply of the Ex sensors and the Ex actuators on the majority of modules. Connecting Ex I/O modules The Ex I/O modules are configured in the same way as standard modules from left to right. Wire the Ex sensors and actuators to the process connector, include any load voltage supply using the cable chamber, and then plug the connector into the module. Note If necessary, a safety assessment of this intrinsically safe power circuit should be carried out by an expert before a sensor or actuator is connected to an Ex module. Replacing Ex I/O modules After being plugged in for the first time, the front connector adopts the module type coding set at the factory. This setting prevents you from unintentionally replacing the module with a different type, i.e. the front connector's mechanical coding prevents snap-on mounting on an incorrect module type. thus fulfilling explosion protection requirements. When replacing Ex modules, carry out the necessary steps in the order described below: Configuration S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 13 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.3 The LK 393 line chamber 1. Disconnect the L+ load voltage supply 2. Unplug the front connector 3. Remove the module Mounting 1. Install the module 2. Plug in the front connector 3. Connect the L+ load voltage supply See also Overview of diagnostic functions (Page 247) The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) 1.3 The LK 393 line chamber Scope of application With the exception of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, all Ex I/O modules require a 24V DC load voltage supply via the process connector. Safety isolation of this signal in order to maintain the minimum thread measure between Ex and non-Ex areas is achieved by using the LK 393 line chamber (Order No. 6ES7393-4AA00-0AA0). Process signals are carried downward while the 24V supply is routed upward in separate ducts. When using the LK 393 line chamber, you must always use the front connector with screwtype contacts. If you use the front connector with spring contacts, the front door of the module can no longer be closed. Connecting the line chamber 1. The lines of the L+ and M connections are cut to the required length, their insulation is stripped and wire end ferrules are fitted. 2. The conductor ends with the ferrules are passed through the openings in the LK 393 line chamber until they are flush with the fastening pins. 3. The conductors are then pressed into the guide ducts of the LK 393 line chamber and routed upward (secure with hot-melt adhesive if necessary). 4. The line chamber pre-assembled in this way is now inserted in the terminals of the front connector. 5. The wire end ferrules of L+ and M are screwed to the terminals 1 and 20 and the fastening pins to terminals 2 and 19. 14 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.3 The LK 393 line chamber This ensures a firm connection of the line chamber with the front connector, thus fulfilling explosion protection safety requirements. The following figs.illustrate the configuration. 1 4 2 3 Load voltage supply Process connector with screw-type connection Ex (i) process cables Line chamber Image 1-1 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Connecting the LK 393 line chamber 15 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.3 The LK 393 line chamber 1 L+ M 2 Wire end ferrule Diameter > 2 mm Image 1-2 Inserting the connecting cables of the load voltage in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires > 2 mm (viewed from below) 1 L+ M 2 Wire end ferrule Diameter < 2 mm Image 1-3 Insert the L+ line in a loop in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires < 2 mm (viewed from below) Note Use Ex I/O modules which require a 24V load voltage exclusively with the LK 393 line chamber. It is necessary for ensuring the modules are used for their intended purpose. 16 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules Image 1-4 LK 393 line chamber when connected You can, of course, also use Ex I/O modules for non-intrinsically safe tasks. You will not need the line chamber in this case. However, you must then clearly and permanently cancel the Ex identification symbol. Subsequent use for Ex applications is no longer possible unless you return the module to the manufacturer for testing. 1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules General information Physical isolation of non-Ex signals from Ex signals corresponds to the requirements with regard to the configuration of explosion-protected automation technology. If the minimum distance of 50 mm between bare connection terminals of Ex modules and bare connection terminals of non-Ex modules can not be maintained, a DM 370 spacer module (order number 6ES7 370-0AA00-0AA0) must be fitted between these modules. Care must be taken to ensure that all automation systems are routed to a common ground. This means: All earthing screws of the sectional rails must be referred to a common ground. The earthing clip of all CPUs must be locked in position. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 17 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules Spacing for arrangement on several subracks The following figure shows the spacing dimensions between the individual subracks as well as to adjacent items of apparatus, cable ducts, cabinet panels etc. for a two-tier S7-300 configuration. 1 40 mm 40 mm IM 361 a 3 200 mm+ a 40 mm 40 mm IM 360 2 Image 1-5 Spacing dimensions for a two-tier S7-300 configuration L+ supply EX CABLE DUCT NON-EX (24V) CABLE DUCT If you maintain these minimum spacing dimensions then: you will guarantee heat dissipation of the S7-300 modules you will have sufficient space to insert and remove the S7-300 modules you will have sufficient space for installing lines Note If you use a shield support element, the specified dimensions apply as from the lower edge of the shield support element. The L+/M lines on the Ex modules can be wired directly or via connection elements. For direct wiring, route the L+/M lines from the cable duct (if a line chamber is used) directly to the terminals of the module front connector. You can route the Ex process lines directly from the front connector to the apparatus. 18 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules You can use commercially available clamp-type distributors for wiring via connection elements. You then have the option of disconnecting the L+/M supply lines module by module by means of a plug connector (see Fig. below). 1 2 3 4 Ex Ex 5 Non Ex-cable duct Connection elements 15 mm top-hat rail Ex modules Ex cable duct Image 1-6 Wiring between L+/M lines and Ex modules via connecting elements See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14 (Page 27) S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 19 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules 1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules ET 200M configurations on two subracks The Figure shows you two ET 200M configurations on two subracks. Place a DM 370 dummy module between the IM153 and the first Ex I/O module in such a way that it doesn't occupy any address area. If you are using an active backplane bus, use an Ex partition (order number 6ES7195-1KA00-0XA0) instead of the dummy module. 1 SIMATIC ET 200M IM 153 DM 370 2 PS SIMATIC ET 200M IM 153 PS DM 370 IM 153 NON-EX CABLE DUCT EX CABLE DUCT S7-300 modules S7-300 modules Image 1-7 20 4 IM 153 3 Two subracks with ET 200M S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems 1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems General Potential differences may develop between the bodies of electrical equipment which are bonded to a protective conductor and the conductive elements of the construction which do not belong to the electrical equipment, for example, the piping. The bridging of such potential differences may cause ignition sparks. Equipotential bonding requires that conductive metal parts which are not touch-protected are interconnected with the ground conductor. A practical central point for equipotential bonding is the distribution cabinet. The cross-section of the equipotential conductor should at least be equivalent to that of the corresponding protective conductor. In all other situations, the minimum cross-section of the equipotential conductor is 10 mm2 Cu. The backplane bus and I/O power circuits of Ex modules feature galvanically isolated, i.e. equipotential bonding is not required for these modules. Exception: Connection to the equipotential conductor if this is necessary for reasons of measuring technology. Where lightning protection devices are required in the intrinsically safe circuit, they must be connected to the EB conductor at the same point as the shield of the intrinsically safe circuits. Generally speaking, the measures described in EN 60079-14 should be used or adhered to. Generally, cable racks must be incorporated throughout the earthing system. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 21 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems Equipotential bonding in buildings All buildings must be equipped with an equipotential bonding facility, to VDE 0100, Parts 410 / 540 and to DIN VDE 0185, which is interconnected with the overall cabling of the automation system. Such facilities if missing must be installed. 0DLQJURXQGFRQQHFWRU 6HFRQGDU\HTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJIRUWKH DXWRPDWLRQV\VWHP +HDWLQJ 6\VWHPVXUIDFH 7HUPLQDOEORFN 3RZHUVXSSOLHV 6(&21'$5<(48,327(17,$/%21',1* HJVWRU\GLVWULEXWLRQERDUG /LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQV\VWHP +RWZDWHU )UHVK ZDWHU 7HOHFRPP XQLFDWLRQ V\VWHP $QWHQQD V\VWHP +$ +HDWLQJ ,QWHUQDOJDV SLSH ,QVXOD WRU &RQQHFWLRQIRU 71V\VWHP :DVWHZDWHU )RXQGDWLRQJURXQG (DUWKWHUPLQDWLRQ 0$,1(48,327(17,$/%21',1* Image 1-8 22 Main and secondary equipotential bonding to VDE S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems Main equipotential bonding This interconnects the following conductive elements by the EB conductor on the EB bus: APA = 0.5 x APE main PE conductor Main ground conductor Earth termination Main water pipes Main gas pipes other metal piping systems Metal structural elements of the building (if possible) power and information system cables extending beyond the building, via lightning conductor. Additional equipotential bonding Connecting the following conductive elements by the EB conductor on the EB bus: All "extraneous conductive elements" such as structural elements, supports, containers, piping (these can themselves form EB conductors), APA = 0.5 x APEmax (A = cable cross section) from the distrib. board. (TXLSPHQW FDELQHW / / / 1 9 (TXLSPHQWFDELQHW ZLWKH[PRGXOHV (TXLSPHQWFDELQHW ZLWKH[PRGXOHV 3(EXV 3RZHUVXSSO\ FDELQHW 3(EXV The bodies of stationary electrical equipment which can be touched simultaneously, if interconnected with PEN (PE connection is sufficient otherwise), AEQ = 0.5 x APE of both appliances. PP PP 3(EXV 3(EXV 3( PP PP PP PP PP JUHHQ\HOORZ PP 7R(%VZLWFK URRP Image 1-9 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 PP (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ (% EXV 6WUXFWXUDOHOHPHQWV FRQWDLQHUVSLSLQJ Example of equipotential bonding in M&C systems 23 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems See also Measures (Page 39) 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems 1.7.1 General information Measures Neither the electrical installation nor the required materials for this such as cables, lines and installation materials are subject to the special test procedure of ElexV with respect to their design. The responsibility of plant personnel or of an installation company for the proper installation of an Ex system is particularly high on account of the risk of explosion in the event of improper implementation. General planning principles for cable routes are very similar to those for piping. At the drafting stage of installation plans and building layouts, areas with increased risk of fire and danger zones must be defined in accordance with ElexV and VbF. The focus should be set on cable and piping tray installations in low-risk areas. Furthermore, accessibility and ease of maintenance must be ensured, also for subsequent expansion. The cabling and line duct passages between the control rooms and operational danger areas must be sealed appropriately in order to prevent any ingress of dangerous gases or fumes into the control room. Note Laying cables in ducts in the floor should be avoided. There is the risk of the penetration or the formation of potentially explosive gas / air mixtures and their uncontrolled propagation, penetration of corrosive liquids. The flexible multicore and single conductor cables used to install intrinsically safe power circuits only require a diameter of 0.1 mm. For implementation in the Ex area, cables and lines must primarily withstand the expected mechanical, chemical and thermal effects. It is therefore always necessary to lay considerably larger cross sections and use cables and lines that are flame-retardant and oil-resistant. Intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe lines (conductors, non-sheathed cables) must be laid separately or with appropriate insulation. Common routing in cables, lines and conductor bundles is not permissible. 24 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems Special care must be taken to ensure full isolation in cable ducts. This can be achieved with a continuous intermediate 1 mm layer of insulating material or by laying sheathed cables (see following table). Routing of cables for intrinsically safe circuits Cable routed in separate, insulating cable ducts Cables routed in a common cable duct with an insulating inter mediate layer (the solid insulating intermediate layer of > 1 mm provides reliable isolation of the intrinsically safe lines in accord ance with EN 60079-11). > 1 mm Any cables of intrinsically / not intrinsically safe circuits with common routing must be capable of withstanding a minimum test voltage of 500 V AC. The high insulation voltage of 500 V AC can be dispensed with if the intrinsically safe or nonintrinsically safe circuits are enclosed in a grounded shield. However, the cables of intrinsically safe circuits must be capable of withstanding at least 500 VAC (conductor-conductor-ground). Intrinsically safe lines must be clearly marked. If a color is used, it must be light-blue. An exception to this rule is the routing of lines within equipment, distribution panels and switchrooms. Cables and lines thus marked must not be used for other purposes. In general, intrinsically safe circuits must be installed in a floating arrangement. A connection to ground via a 15 kOhm resistor, e.g. to discharge electrostatic charges, does not qualify as a ground. Intrinsically safe circuits must be bonded to ground if necessary for reasons of measuring technology or safety. The circuit may only be grounded once to the equipotential bonding system. Equipotential bonding must exist in the entire installation of intrinsically safe circuits. The terminal elements of systems which contain intrinsically / not intrinsically safe circuits, for example, in measuring and control cabinets, must comply with EN 60079-11 directives. The connections of the intrinsically safe circuits must be marked as intrinsically safe. Light-blue must be used if color coding is preferred. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 25 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems 1.7.2 Marking of Cables and Lines of Intrinsically Safe Circuits Marking Cables and lines of intrinsically safe circuits must be marked. Where jackets or sheaths are color-coded, light-blue must be chosen as the color. Cables and lines thus marked must not be used for other purposes. Equalizing conductors for thermocouples with a plastic sheath may be provided with colored longitudinal stripes as follows, according to the type of thermocouple: Copper/cupro-nickel (copper/constantan) brown Iron/cupro-nickel (iron/constantan) dark blue Nickel-chrome/nickel green Platinum-rhodium/platinum white In the case of equalizing conductors for thermocouples with a mineral sheath or metal braid, a light-blue strip of sufficient width must be woven in as the color code for intrinsic safety. Within measurement and control cabinets and in the interior of switching and distribution systems, special measures must be taken where there is a risk of interchanging the lines of intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits, e.g. where there is a blue neutral conductor in compliance with DIN 47002. The following measures are acceptable: Bundling of conductors in a common light-blue sheath, Labeling, clear arrangement and physical separation. 1.7.3 Wiring and Cabling in Cable Bedding Made of Metal or in Conduits Protection measures Cable bedding made of metal must be incorporated in the protective measures to counteract indirect contact. This can be achieved by routing an existing ground conductor made of steel strip or with a good conductive connection between individual beds. For single laying, conduits made of metal are now only usually used where particular mechanical or thermal stress is developed. In general, PVC conduits of two different types are used depending on the expected mechanical stress. Remember, however, that PVC exhibits a linear expansion which is about 8 times that of metal. The fixing points must therefore be such that the linear expansion is taken up. 26 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems 1.7.4 Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14 Overview The table below once again highlights the most important cable and conductor specifications to EN 60079-14. Table 1-1 Cables and lines application General requirements: note additional require ments for "i" and zone 0) Requirements of cables and lines Select according to mechanical, chemical and thermal influences (refer to DIN VDE 0298 and DIN VDE 0891) Protection against the distribution of fire. Cable routing in sand, for example. Proof of combustibility properties of cables in accordance with DIN VDE 0472 part 804, test type B. Cu or Al conductors. Al conductors should only be used when installing multicore cables starting at 25 mm2, or single-conductor cables starting at 35 mm2, using suitable terminal elements. (smaller cross section per missible for multicore lines with more than 5 cores, and lines for measurement and control) Minimum cross sections for copper conductor: single-core cable: multi-core cable: Permissible types for porta U <= 750 V ble/mobile apparatus (does not apply to intrinsically U <= 250 V safe systems) S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 1 mm fine, 1.5 mm solid conductor 0.75 mm fine, otherwise as above Flexible cable H07RN or equiv alent (e.g. NSHou) flexible cable H07RN or equiv alent I <= 6 A no severe mechanical stresses in M&C systems, Wire remote control and telecommunications system Plastic-sheathed flexible cable H05VV-F minimum cross sec tion 1 mm2 (not at ambient tem peratures below 5 C) 27 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems Table 1-2 Contents of EN 6007914, continued Application Laying cables and lines Requirements of cables and lines Sealing of cable passages in Ex and non-Ex areas, for example, by means of sand pockets, plastering or similar. Sealing of unused cable inlets using certified caps (certification not required for Zone 2) where there is particular thermal, mechanical or chemical stress, protect cables and lines, e.g. by laying in conduit, sheaths, metal tubing (not in enclosed conduits) where routed into a pressure-resistant enclosure, use certified cable lead-in elements. Connection of cables and lines Conductors outside the appliance may only be connected by crimping. Conductor connections within apparatus should use suitable clamps, multicore or fine conductor ends should be secured against separation Crimp connections can be protected with cast resin applications or heatshrink sleeves, provided these are not subject to mechanical stress. See also Types of cables (Page 29) 1.7.5 Selecting the cables and wires in accordance with EN 60079-14 Specification Cables and wires laid in hazardous areas do not require a test certificate in accordance with Elex V. The electrical data of cables used for intrinsically safe M&C circuits must be specified (for example, capacitance at 200 nF/km, inductivity at 1 mH/km). The following applies within a group cable: The insulation between lines of intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits must 28 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems withstand an alternating voltage of 2U + 1000 V, but at least 1500 V, where U is the sum of rms voltage values of the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits. Table 1-3 Minimum cross sections of copper conductors in accordance with Cable type Number of cores Flexible stran ded conductor mm2 Solid conduc tor mm2 Conductor di ameter mm Power cables and lines in ac cordance with DIN VDE 0298, Part 1, 3 1 2-5 >5 1 0,75 0,5 1,5 1,5 1 - Wiring cables and lines in ac cordance with DIN VDE 0891, Parts 1, 5, 6 for voltages >1 0,5 0,5 0,8 2 >2 2 (shielded) 0,5 0,28 0,28 0,5 0,28 0,28 0,8 0,6 0,6 < AC 60 V or 120 V DC 1.7.6 Types of cables Overview Suitable process signal cables are installation cables for industrial electronic systems (SIMATIC cable) with bundled twisted-pair, color-coded conductors. Cables with a solid conductor (0.5 mm2 cross section, 0.8 mm diameter) have a static shield. Cables with flexible stranded conductors (J-LIYCY) have a braided shield (C) made of copper wires. Table 1-4 Types of cables Cable designation Cable for A-Y(St) YY nx2x0.8/1.4 BdSi Outdoor cable (burying in ground1) J-Y(St) Y nx2x0.8/1.4 BdSi Normal applications J-LiYY nx2x0.5/1.6 BdSi Compact control stations J-LiYCY nx2x0.5/1.6 BdSi Vibration and impact stresses Connector installation 1 Direct burying in ground is not recommended. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 29 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards The type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards are listed in the following: 1 2 3 5 1 Basic type 2 rated voltage 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 insulating material sheath material Special features Conductor 9 H harmonized type A national type 03 300/300 Volt 05 300/500 Volt 07 450/750 Volt V PVC R Rubber S silicon rubber V PVC R Rubber N cloroprene rubber J glass fiber braid T fabric braid H ribbon cable, separable H2 ribbon cable, not separable U single-core R multi-core K fine (permanently installed) F fine (flexible) H extra fine wire Y tinsel 7 Number of cores ... Number of cores 8 protective conductor X without protective conductor G with protective conductor ... specified in mm2 9 conductor cross section Image 1-10 30 4 Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems Type designations for telecommunication cables and lines Type designations for telecommunication cables and lines are listed in the following: 1 2 1 2 3 4 x 3 4 5 6 x 7 Basic type Supplement Insulating material Design features 8 9 10 11 A Outdoor cable G Mining cable J Wiring cable L Sheathed cable S Switchboard cable B Lightning protection system J Induction-protected E Electronics Y PVC 2Y Polyethylene O2Y Cellular PE 5Y PTFE 6Y FEP 7Y ETFE P PAPER F Petrolatum filler L Aluminum sheath LD Corrugated aluminum (ST) Aluminum tape (K) Metal foil shield W Copper tape shield M Corrugated steel sheath Mz Lead sheath B Special lead sheath C Armoring E Jute sheath & ground Compound layer + tape 5 Sheath material (refer to 3. Isolation) 6 Number of elements n Number of stranding elements 7 Stranding element 1 Single core 2 Pair 8 Conductor diameter ... in mm 9 Stranding element F Star quad (railway) St Star quad (phantom) St I Star quad (long distance cable) St III Star quad (local cable) TF Star quad for TF S Signal cable (railway) S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 31 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems 10 11 Type of stranding Sheath color Table 1-5 PiMF shielded pair Lg Layer stranding Bd Unit stranding BL blue Siemens cables for measurement and control to DIN VDE 0815 Cable designation Order Number JE-LIYCY 2x2x0.5 BD SI BL V45483-F25-C15 JE-LIYCY 16x2x0.5 BD SI BL V45483-F165-C15 JE-LIYCY 32x2x0.5 BD SI BL V45483-F325-C55 JE-Y(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 BD SI BL V45480-F25-C25 JE-Y(ST)Y 16x2x0.8 BD SI BL V45480-F165-C35 JE-Y(ST)Y 32x2x0.8 BD SI BL V45480-F325-C25 JE-Y(ST)Y 100x2x0.8 BD SI BL V45480-F1005-C15 Characteristic values of cables for intrinsically safe circuits Example: Cable type JE-LiYCY Coupling 200 pF/100 m at 800 Hz Working capacity c. 200 nF/km at 800 Hz Working inductance c. 1 mH/km Minimum bending radius for permanent installation 6 x line diameter Temperature range, permanent installation - 30 C to 70 C for moveable use Test voltage - 5 C to 50 C core/core 2000 V, core/shield 500 V, Loop resistance 1.7.7 c. 80 /km Requirements of Terminals for Intrinsically Safe Type of Protection Requirements These must be identifiable, for example by their type designation, and the following constructional requirements must be observed: Clearance in air and leakage path in accordance with EN 60079-0/EN 60079-11 between two connection elements of different intrinsically safe circuits must be at least 6 mm. Clearance in air and leakage path between connection elements of each intrinsically safe circuit and grounded metal parts must be not less than 3 mm. Marking of connection elements must be unambiguous and easily recognized. When a color is used for this purpose, it must be light blue. The following must also be observed with regard to the use of terminals: 32 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage Connection terminals of intrinsically safe circuits must be at a distance of at least 50 mm from connection elements or bare conductors of any non-intrinsically safe circuit, or must be isolated from it by an insulating partition or grounded metal partition. When such partitions are used, they must extend at least by up to 1.5 mm from the housing panels, or must ensure a minimum clearance of 50 mm between connection elements, measured around the partition in all directions. The insulation between an intrinsically safe circuit and the chassis of the electrical apparatus or parts which may be grounded must withstand an alternating rms voltage of twice the voltage value of the intrinsically safe circuit, but at least 500 V. 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage 1.8.1 Shielding Definition Shielding is a method of attenuating magnetic, electric or electromagnetic interference fields. Shielding can be subdivided into Equipment Shielding Line Shielding 1.8.2 Equipment Shielding General information Particularly observe the following when cabinets and housings are incorporated in control system shielding: Cabinet covers such as side panels, rear panels, top and bottom panels, must make contact in an overlapping arrangement at adequate distances (e.g. 50 mm). Doors must be given additional contact with the cabinet ground. Use several grounding strips. Lines exiting the shielded housing should either be shielded or routed via filters. Where the cabinet contains sources of severe interference (transformers, lines to motors, etc.), they must be partitioned from sensitive electronic areas with metal plates. The metal plates must have several low-impedance bolted joints to the cabinet ground. Interference voltages picked up in the programmable controller via non-Ex signal and supply lines are diverted to the central ground point (standard sectional rail). The central ground point should have a low-impedance connection to the PE conductor via a copper conductor (> = 10 mm2) which is as short as possible. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 33 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage 1.8.3 Line Shielding Non-Ex circuits Both ends of the cable shields are usually bonded to cabinet potential at a suitable conductive point. Satisfactory suppression of all frequencies picked up can only be achieved by shielding at both ends. Shielding of systems with optimal equipotential bonding Vital aspects in the optimization of a system's EMC properties are the shielding of system components and, in particular, of their connecting cables, and that the system shielding forms an encompassing electrical shell. The significance of this requirement increases with the scope of signal frequencies processed in the systems. In ideal cases, the cable shields are connected to the housings which are often metal or corresponding shielding of the connected field devices. Since, as a rule, they are linked to chassis ground (or to the PE conductor), the shield of the signal cable is grounded at several points. This procedure is optimum for electromagnetic compatibility and personal protection. It can be applied in these systems without any restrictions. 6 ([PRGXOHV 0DLQFDEOH 6WXEFDEOH )LHOGGHYLFH 6WXEFDEOH )LHOGGHYLFH &HQWUDOJURXQGLQJSRLQW 6 7HUPLQDO EORFN (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJFRQGXFWRU Image 1-11 34 Shielding and equipotential bonding conductors for non-Ex circuits S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage Ex circuits Three aspects must be considered with regard to the design of shielding and grounding of an S7-300 system: Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Explosion protection Personal protection Grounding and shielding of intrinsically safe circuits EN 60079-14 stipulates general equipotential bonding in potentially explosive environments in order to prevent potential differences and resultant sparking. The equipotential bonding system must be designed and implemented to DIN VDE 0100! In accordance with EN 60079-14, intrinsically safe circuits are generally not grounded. They must be grounded if this is required for safety reasons. They can be grounded if this is required for functional reasons. The circuit may only be grounded once to the equipotential bonding system. Intrinsically safe signal lines and cables are shielded in order to meet measuring technology requirements or to prevent inductive coupling, because the system often generates low signal levels. The section below outlines the procedures of planning the equipotential bonding of intrinsically safe signal lines: Metal enclosures with safe contact to construction elements as a result of their mounting fixtures are integrated in the system's equipotential bonding circuit and thus do not require separate grounding. The shielding is grounded at only one point in order to avoid looping. In Zone 1, 2 and 21 systems, the shielding is grounded outside the danger area, i.e. ideally in the measurement control system. The cable shields must be isolated from devices operated in the potentially explosive zone. The measured value is routed via twisted-pair signal cable (single cable) to a distribution cabinet, and from there to the measuring room via multicore cable. The shield is insulated at all intermediate points. In Zone 0, the cable shield is connected to equipotential ground by wiring it directly to the device connection housing (usually Zone 1). The apparatus is grounded directly via the ground conductor. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 35 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage Shielding of lines in the hazardous area Table 1-6 Shielding of Ex lines in the hazardous area Ex area Non-Ex area SIMATIC Ex modules 1 2 3 (1) Sensor or actuator (2) shield (3) line 2 1 1 2 (1) Shield support with strain relief (1) strain relief (2) insulation (2) cable shield 1.8.4 Measures to Counteract Interference Voltages Assembling the control system Measures to suppress interference voltages are often only implemented when the control system is already in operation and proper reception of a useful signal is impaired. Expenditure involved with such measures (special relays, for example) can be reduced considerably when installing the control system by making allowances for the items outlined below. Included here: favorable arrangement of equipment and lines grounding of all inactive metal elements filtering of power cables and signal lines 36 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage shielding of equipment and lines special interference-suppression measures Physical arrangement of equipment and lines Magnetic DC or AC fields of low frequency, such as 50 Hz, can only be sufficiently attenuated at great expense. In such a case, however, you can often solve the problem by providing the greatest possible distance between the interference source and sink. Note The analog Ex modules operate based on a method which suppresses faults caused by AC system ripple. Grounding of inactive metal elements Well implemented grounding is an important factor for interference-free assembly. Grounding is understood to mean a good electrical connection of all inactive metal elements (VDE 0160). The principle of surface grounding should be followed. All conductive, inactive metal elements should be grounded! Observe the following when grounding: All ground connections must have a low impedance. All metal elements should have a large-area connection. Use particularly wide grounding strips for the connection. The surface of the ground connection and not only its cross section is decisive. Screw-type connections should always have spring washers or lock washers. Protection against electrostatic discharge In order to protect the devices and modules against electrostatic discharge, these should be installed in fully enclosed metal housings or cabinets which feature proper conductive connections both to the grounding busbar at the installation location and to the main equipotential conductor. You should preferably use cast iron or steel sheet enclosures. Plastic housings should always have a metallized surface. Doors or covers of housings should be connected to the grounded body of the housing with ground strips or contact springs. If you are working on the system with the cabinet open, observe the guidelines for protective measures for electrostatically sensitive devices (ESDs). The risk of ignition as a result of electrostatic charge must be safely excluded in the system installation. Refer to "Guidelines for avoiding the risk of ignition resulting from electrostatic charges" laid down by the main association of Industrial Employers' Liability Insurance. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 37 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage If electrostatic charges cannot be avoided, the charge should be kept as low as possible or safe discharge should be provided. The following measures, in particular, should be applied: Electrostatic grounding of all conductive elements. Solid materials can be considered as being electrostatically grounded if their leakage resistance at any point is not greater than 106 . Under favorable conditions, 108 is also satisfactory, particularly for small equipment of low capacitance. Reducing the electrical resistance of the material moved or parts moved with respect to each other. Incorporating grounded metal elements in material subject to electrostatic charging. Increasing the relative air humidity. By increasing the relative air humidity to about 65 % with air conditioning, sprays or by hanging moist cloths, the surface resistance of most nonconductive materials can be adequately reduced. However, if the surface of plastic material is water-repellent, this measure will not succeed. Ionization of the air. 1.8.5 The Most Important Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC Overview To ensure EMC, it is often sufficient to observe some elementary rules. When assembling the control system, take into consideration the five following basic rules. 1. When installing the programmable controllers, ensure high quality surface grounding of the inactive metal elements - Connect all inactive metal elements over a large area and at low impedance. - On painted and anodized metal elements, make screwed connections with special contact washers or remove the insulating protective layers. - Provide a central connection between chassis ground and the ground/protective conductor system. 2. When wiring always follow the code of practice for line routing - Subdivide the cabling into line groups. - (AC power cables, supply lines, Ex and non-Ex signal lines, data lines). - Always install power cables and signal or data lines in separate ducts or bundles. - Route the signal and data lines as closely as possible to grounded surfaces such as supporting bars, metal rails, cabinet sheet metal panels. - Install Ex and non-Ex signal lines in separate ducts. 38 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.9 Lightning Protection 3. Ensure that line shields are properly secured - Data lines should be shielded when laid. The shield should be connected accordingly, see chapter Line Shielding (Page 34). - Analog lines should be shielded when laid. When low-amplitude signals are transmitted, it may be advantageous if the shield is connected at only one end. - For Ex signal lines, connect the line shields only at the sensor or actuator end. Ensure the connected shield continues without interruption as far as the module, but do not connect it there. - Make sure the shield has a low-impedance connection to equipotential ground. - Use metal or metallized plug housings for shielded data lines. 4. Implement special EMC measures for particular applications - For all inductances, fit quenching elements provided they are not already contained in the output modules. - Use incandescent bulbs for lighting the cabinets and avoid fluorescent lamps. 5. Harmonize the reference potential and, where possible, connect all electrical components to ground - Take care to ensure specific grounding measures. Grounding of the control system is a protective and functional measure. - System elements and cabinets should be connected in star-configuration to the ground/ protective conductor system. In this way you can avoid the formation of ground loops. - Install equipotential conductors of sufficient size to compensate for any potential differences between the system components and cabinets. 1.9 Lightning Protection 1.9.1 Measures Overview In systems with hazardous areas, the most important task, not least for reasons of explosion protection, is to avoid overvoltages; where this is not possible, they must be reduced and safely discharged. In addition to the provision of external lightning protection, these measures cover internal lightning protection and overvoltage protection. These measures must be coordinated with the equipment-related EMC. You will find more detailed information on the subjects of lightning protection and overvoltage protection in the manuals of the individual systems as specified in the foreword. Here, you will also find an overview of the components which can be used for this purpose. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 39 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.9 Lightning Protection 1.9.2 External Lightning Protection/Shielding of Buildings Measures External lightning protection is a measure for preventing damage to buildings and fire damage. For this task, a large-mesh wire cage consisting of lightning conductors and down conductors is sufficient. On buildings with sensitive electronic equipment such as control rooms, the external lightning protection must be supplemented by a building shield. For these purposes, where possible, metal facades and reinforcements of walls, floors and ceilings on or in the building are connected to form shield cages. Where this is not possible, the lightning conductor and down conductor should have a reduced mesh size and, where applicable, the supporting structure of the intermediate floor should be electrically interconnected. Electrical equipment protruding above roof level must be protected against direct lightning strikes. When such equipment is metallically connected to the external lightning protection system, a partial current is picked up by the building in the event of a lightning strike; this can result in destruction of the equipment sensitive to overvoltages. The pick-up of partial lightning currents can be prevented by protecting the electrical equipment protruding above the roof from direct lightning strikes by means of rods insulated from the equipment (45 degree protective area), or by cage-type tensioned wires or cables. The down conductors for external lightning protection and, if applicable, the reinforcements and supporting structures, should be connected to the ground system. Each individual building has its own functioning ground system. The ground systems are meshed to create a common grounding network. The voltage between the buildings is thus reduced. 1.9.3 Creating distributed systems with S7-300 and ET 200M Measures The process engineering of a plant, such as gas supply, requires a wide-ranging exchange of information between the systems with the distributed Ex I/O devices and the central, electrical or electronic measurement and control system. This necessitates a great number of cable connections, sometimes extending over several hundred meters - in the case of gas storage systems, over several thousands of meters. In the event of a lightning strike, therefore, extensive voltage pick-up occurs. A distributed arrangement of instrumentation and control equipment with relatively short cables to the plant, and the connection of distributed I/O stations to each other and to the central controller via a bus (PROFIBUS-DP) or fiber-optic cable, are an important measure for reducing overvoltages between sections of the plant. You will find more detailed information on this arrangement in the manuals specified in the foreword. 40 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.9 Lightning Protection 1.9.4 Shielding of Cables and Buildings Measures Overvoltages between separate plant sections or buildings cannot be avoided in practice by meshing. In the event of a lightning strike, a circulating current will flow over the path created by metal connections between the buildings or between a building and I/O device. Cable cores are ideal for this purpose. The lightning or partial lightning current must therefore be offered other conductive connections. Shielding which can be implemented in different ways is particularly suitable, for example: a helical current-rated metal strip or metal braid as the cable shield, e.g. NYCY or A2Y(K)Y. By installing the cables in continuously connected metal conduits which are grounded at both ends. By installing the cables in reinforced concrete ducts with through-connected reinforcement or on closed metal cable racks. By laying conductors (shield conductors) in parallel with cables. This measure, however, only relieves the cables of partial lightning currents. or By laying fiber-optic cables. Overvoltage-sensitive equipment must also be shielded to ensure the currents at the cable ends cannot destroy this equipment. This is achieved with metal housings or by installing the equipment in metal cabinets which are connected to the ground conductor. 1.9.5 Equipotential bonding for lightning protection Measures "Internal lightning protection" covers all the additional measures which prevent the magnetic and electrical effects of the lightning current within the building to be protected. These measures include in particular "equipotential bonding for lightning protection" in order to reduce potential differences caused by lightning current. Internal lightning protection is based on the principle of the inclusion of all incoming and outgoing lines of a protected volume in the equipotential bonding system for lightning protection, i.e. in addition to the entire metal piping systems (gas, water and heating), this includes all power and IT cables which must be wired to corresponding protective devices. Since considerable, partial lightning currents can flow over such lines and must be discharged by the protective devices, they must be chosen for a suitable current carrying capacity (lightning current conductors). S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 41 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.9 Lightning Protection 1.9.6 Overvoltage Protection General Effectiveness depends very much on the connection and cable routing of the overvoltage protection devices. When the devices are used in hazardous areas or intrinsically safe circuits, EN60079-14 must be adhered to. When the system is installed, the minimum igniting curves and maximum heating specified by EN 60079-11 must be adhered to. Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits Overvoltage protection devices can protect intrinsically safe circuits from overvoltage. +D]DUGRXVDUHD 6DIHDUHD ([PRGXOH 6HQVRU /LJKWQLQJDUUHVWHU /LJKWQLQJDUUHVWHU &HQWUDOJURXQGLQJSRLQW Image 1-12 Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits The discussion of safety-relevant aspects is limited to the direct comparison of the data for inductance and capacity. Table 1-7 Comparison of data for inductance and capacity Ex module Comparison Lightning ar rester 1 Line Lightning ar rester 2 Sensor/actua tor La LBD1 +LLtg +LBD2 +Li Ca CBD1 +CLtg +CBD2 +Ci Table 1-8 Example of the comparison of data for inductance and capacity Ex module Comparison Lightning ar rester 1 Line Lightning ar rester 2 Sensor/actua tor La = 4 mH < 0.5 H < 50 H < 0.5 mH < 0.6 mH Ca = 270 nF < 1 nF < 10 nF < 6 nF < 6 nF The overvoltage protection elements described in this section are only effective if used together with external lightning protection. External lightning protection measures reduce the effects of a lightning strike. You can obtain suitable lightning conductors for Ex modules from: 42 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.9 Lightning Protection DEHN + SOHNE GmbH + Co. KG Elektrotechnische Fabrik Hans-Dehn-Str. 1 D-92318 Neumarkt http://www.dehn.de (http://www.dehn.de) 1.9.7 Example of Lightning and Overvoltage Protection Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station Fig. "Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station" shows an example of how protective devices can be used. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 43 44 Image 1-13 /9 V\VWHP 3$ &RQWUROURRP 0 & FDELQHW &RQWUROURRP VKLHOGHG &DEOHGXFW VKLHOGHG 6WDWLRQJURXQG 0 & HTXLSPHQW 6XEGLYLVLRQ ,QVXODWLQJIODQJH V\VWHP $QQH[ 3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHQRWUHTXLUHGZLWKVXLWDEOHV\VWHPVKLHOGLQJ r 0 3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHQRWUHTXLUHGIRUHTXLSPHQWZLWKKLJKGLHOHFWULFVWUHQJWK 0 &HTXLSPHQW 3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHQRWUHTXLUHGIRUVKLHOGHGFDEOHVDQGORZFRVW 3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHUHTXLUHGIRUKLJKFRVW0 &HTXLSPHQW 6SDUNJDS 3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHIRU0 &V\VWHPV 3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHIRU$&SRZHUV\VWHP 6PRNHGHWHFWRU ,QVXODWLRQ 3$ /DPS 0 &RPSUHVVRUED\ VKLHOGHG &DEOHUDFNVDV(%ULQJ 0HWDO FRQGXLW Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.9 Lightning Protection Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas 1.9.8 Lightning Strike Measures When lightning strikes an explosive atmosphere it always ignites. There is also a risk of ignition due to an excessive rise in temperature in the lightning discharge paths. In order to prevent, at Zones 0, 1 and 20 themselves, the harmful effects of lightning strikes occurring outside of these zones, surge diverters, for example, must be fitted at suitable points. Overground metal tank systems which are equipped with electrical appliances or electrically conductive components which are electrically isolated to the container require equipotential bonding, for example, of measuring and control equipment and of the filling tubes. Note Lightning protection equipment and grounding systems must be tested by an expert upon their completion and at regular intervals. In conjunction with ElexV, an inspection interval of three years is specified for electrical and lightning protection systems operated in potentially explosive rooms. Summary: Enhanced external lightning protection (reduced mesh size, increased number of down conductors) on all buildings and systems. Meshing of grounding systems in the building to create area grounding. Meshed equipotential bonding. Fitting of lightning conductors and surge diverters in the power system. Fitting of overvoltage fine-protection devices at both ends of measurement and control cables. Shielding of M&C cables. M&C cables with twisted pairs of cores. 1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas 1.10.1 Safety Measures Introduction All possible measures which eliminate the risk of explosion must be implemented not only when using programmable controllers in hazardous areas but also during the installation stage. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 45 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas Sparks capable of causing ignition during mechanical work Tools which tend to produce sparks must not be used for working in potentially explosive systems or system sections in operation. Copperberyllium is a suitable material for tools such as screwdrivers, pliers, wrenches, hammers and chisels. Since this material has low wearresistance, the tools should be used with care. Sparks capable of causing ignition during mechanical work low when bare steel elements strike each other possible when steel elements collide or drop great when striking rusty steel very great when striking rusty steel with an alloy coating (e.g. aluminum paint) The possibility of creating sparks capable of causing ignition is substantially reduced by using non-sparking tools. Exception: when the tool is harder than the workpiece. Measures for eliminating the risk of explosion Safely closing off the working area, e.g. with dummy panels. Good ventilation of the rooms. Flushing with inert gas. Testing the effectiveness of the flushing (gas tester). Then working with a normal tool. If the risk of explosion at the workplace cannot be eliminated, the following measures must be implemented: Avoidance of collisions and dropping of steel elements. Wearing antistatic shoes, e.g. leather shoes or using shoe grounding strips. Avoiding rust layers and aluminum coating at impact points. If this is not possible, eliminating the risk of explosion locally, e.g. with inert gas. Adequate air supply and waste air disposal. Removing or enclosing readily flammable substances in the vicinity. Keeping the workplace and, if applicable, floor moist. Table 1-9 Safety Measures Working area Safety Measures Installations with readily flammable gas and vapor-air mixtures, e.g. hydrogen, city gas, acetylene and hydrogen sul phide Working only allowed after implementation of special safety measures and with written permission of plant manager. Only non-sparking tools to be used (tool softer than workpiece). Installations with gas and vapor-air mix Sufficient to use non-sparking tools. Exception: For materials tures such as methane, propane, bu with rust formation and aluminum coating or similar, special tane and petrol protective measures required. Installations with risk of explosion from readily flammable dust 46 Remove dust deposits. Keep working area wet and protect against dust formation. Normal tools may be used. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas Note Working on energized electrical installations and apparatus in hazardous industrial premises is prohibited. This also includes the disconnection of live control lines for test purposes. As an exception, work on intrinsically safe circuits is permitted; also, in special cases, work on other electrical systems where the user has certified in writing that there is no risk of explosion for the duration of the work at the site. If necessary, a fire permit must also be obtained. Grounding and short-circuiting may only be carried out in hazardous industrial premises when there is no risk of explosion at the point of grounding and short-circuiting. Use measuring instruments which are approved for the zones to test for no voltages. 1.10.2 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 2 License SIMATIC S7 Ex modules are permitted for use in zone 2 (category 3G). Note in this case the specific conditions on the EU special test certificate (see certificates of conformity on theInternet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)). 1.10.3 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 1 Types of protection It is basically possible to install a SIMATIC assembly in a hazardous area zone 1. However, the system installer must implement additional measures in order to protect the modules. Two types of protection are available: the Ex assembly is installed in a "pressurized enclosure"; the Ex assembly is installed in a "pressure-resistant, enclosed casing". The following figure shows a possible configuration for zone 1 in a pressure-resistant, enclosed casing with a terminal housing that provides an increased level of safety. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 47 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas 1RQH[FDEOH GXFW ([ L FDEOH GXFW ,0 36 60V &38 ([Gb &DELQHW ([Hb 7HUPLQDO ([Gb 6ZLWFK ([Lb 7HUPLQDOV ([Hb &DELQHW 9'& VXSSO\ YROWDJH 3URILEXV'3 EXVFDEOHV ([VHQVRUVDFWXDWRUV =RQH 6DIHDUHD $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP Image 1-14 SIMATIC Ex modules in hazardous area Housing The selected type of housing is characterized by the fact that it is able to withstand explosions occurring inside the housing and that an explosive gas/air mixture surrounding the housing is not ignited. In addition, the surface temperature does not exceed the limit values of the temperature classes. Cable glands that are protected against transmission of internal ignition and isolated against the housing wall must be used for routing the supply leads into the pressure-resistant, enclosed casing. A housing with "increased safety" is used as a terminal compartment. Special screwed glands are used for the cable entries. The housing must be certified by a testing authority to comply with the "Ex d" type of protection and the relevant design requirements. Explosion protection of the housing: Ex de II T5 .. T6. Cables The cables used must comply with the EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-11 standards for intrinsically safe circuits or EN 60079-7 for circuits with increased safety. 48 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas The cables for the assembly are to be installed in such a way that they are endangered neither by thermal, mechanical nor chemical load or stress. Note If necessary, the cables should be installed in cable conduits. Terminals The terminal connectors for the power supply cable and the bus line should always meet the requirements of the "increased safety" tape of protection. The clamping points of the intrinsically safe circuits should always be implemented according to the guidelines of "Intrinsic safety". Protective device The assembly is connected to a 24 V DC supply circuit fed by a power supply unit with safe electrical isolation. The supply circuit must be protected by an appropriate circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is installed outside the Ex zone. Switch The switch for enabling the system should comply with the "Ex de II T6" type of protection. Table 1-10 Working on systems to type of protection: Ex de [ib] T5 .. T6 Type of protection of apparatus used in system Type of work to be carried out Ex ib Ex e S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Work within Additional require ments and notes Zone 1 Zone 2 Opening the hous ing, Ex i/e housing only allowed allowed Connecting/dis connecting lines allowed allowed Current, voltage and resistance measurement allowed with certi fied apparatus allowed Soldering prohibited allowed if solder ing temperature lower than ignition temperature Zone 1 Zone 2 if no other appara tus is in the hous ing 49 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus Type of protection of apparatus used in system Type of work to be carried out Additional require ments and notes Opening the hous ing, Ex i/e housing only allowed allowed Connecting/dis connecting lines not allowed unless in de-energized state only in de-ener gized state and if no risk of explosion Current, voltage and resistance measurement voltage measure ment with certified apparatus only voltage measure ment with certified apparatus only Soldering prohibited allowed in de-ener gized state if sol dering tempera ture lower than ig nition temperature Zone 1 Zone 2 Opening the hous ing, Ex d housing only prohibited allowed if no risk of explosion Connecting/dis connecting lines not allowed unless in de-energized state allowed if no risk of explosion Current, voltage and resistance measurement Work not possible allowed if no risk of explosion Ex d Soldering 1.11 Work within prohibited if no other appara tus is in the hous ing apparatus in pres sure-resistant en closure are no lon ger protected against explosion if housing is opened allowed in de-ener gized state if sol dering tempera ture lower than ig nition temperature Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus Replacing equipment Work on electrical systems or equipment can only be carried out if a "permit" has been granted. If electrical equipment is replaced, attention must be paid to the correct temperature class, explosion group, and corresponding (Ex) zone. Certificates of conformity, EU special test certificates, and design approval must be available. 50 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus Maintaining apparatus Repaired electrical apparatus may only be placed in operation again after testing by a recognized expert in accordance with paragraph 15 of ElexV, and the test has been certified, unless explosion protection has not been affected by the repair. If the repair affects explosion protection, only original spare parts may be used. Improvised repairs which no longer ensure explosion protection of apparatus are not permitted. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 51 Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus 52 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.1 2 Chapter overview Overview The following SIMATIC S7 Ex digital modules are described in this chapter: Digital input SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, Order number: 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0 Digital output SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, Order number: 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0 Digital output SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, Order number: 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0 Notes You will find information on the relevant safety standards and on other safety regulations in the Appendix Standards and Licenses (Page 249). The general technical specifications in the device manual S7-300 Module Specifications, see Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8859629). 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) 2.2.1 Features and technical specifications Order Number 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0 Features SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR has the following properties: 4 inputs - electrically isolated from the bus - electrically isolated from each other load voltage 24 V DC S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 53 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) connectable sensors - to DIN EN 60947-5-6 or IEC 60947-5-6 - interconnected mechanical contacts (with diagnostic evaluation) - open-circuited mechanical contacts (without diagnostics) 4 short circuit-proof outputs for the encoder power supply (8.2 V) Operating points: logic "1" 2.1 mA logic "0" 1.2 mA Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs Fault indications = red LEDs for - group fault indication (SF) - channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3) configurable diagnostics configurable diagnostic interrupt configurable process interrupt Intrinsic safety of inputs in accordance with EN 60079-11 2-wire encoder connection Supports time stamping Configuration in Run (CiR) supported 54 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Wiring diagram of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR 60 ',[1$085 6) ) ,QSXWb ,QSXWb ) / 9 . 9 . [ [ ,QSXWb ) ,QSXWb ) ; 5'$% / 9 N N . 9 N . [ &RQWDFWZLWK 0RQLWRULQJIRU ZLUHEUHDN OLQHVKRUWFLUFXLW RQO\LIUHVLVWDQFH GLUHFWO\RQFRQWDFW &RQWDFWZLWK 0RQLWRULQJIRU ZLUHEUHDN RQO\LIUHVLVWDQFH GLUHFWO\RQFRQWDFW 9 . 9 . 0 9 . . 0 :LULQJGLDJUDPIRU 1$085VHQVRUZLWK PRQLWRULQJIRU ZLUHEUHDN VKRUWFLUFXLW :LULQJGLDJUDPIRU FRQWDFWV FRQQHFWLRQ YDULDQWV &RQWDFW ZLWKRXWPRQLWRULQJ &KDQQHOQXPEHU 6)JURXSIDXOW>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@ Image 2-1 Wiring diagram of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module. Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 55 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Block diagram SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR 0RQLWRULQJ /PRGXOH 0RQLWRULQJ LQWHUQDOVXSSO\ YROWDJH / 9ORDGYROWDJH 9 0 6HQVRUVXSSO\ 1$085VHQVRU PRQLWRULQJIRU ZLUHEUHDN FRQGXFWRUVKRUWFLUFXLW /RJLF &KDQQHO 9 6WDWXV (UURU 6 EDFN SODQH EXV /RJLF (YDO XD WLRQ N 9 &KDQQHO &RQWDFWZLWK PRQLWRULQJIRU ZLUHEUHDN FRQGXFWRUVKRUWFLUFXLW UHVLVWRUFRQQHFWHG GLUHFWO\ WRFRQWDFW N N &RQWDFWZLWK PRQLWRULQJIRU ZLUHEUHDN UHVLVWRUFRQQHFWHGGLUHFWO\ WRFRQWDFW 9 &KDQQHO N N N 9 &KDQQHO N *URXSHUURU GLVSOD\ 6) UHG Image 2-2 6WDWXV GLVSOD\ JUHHQ &RQWDFWZLWKRXW PRQLWRULQJ &RQQHFWLRQYDULDQWV &KDQQHOIDXOW GLVSOD\ )) UHG Block diagram of the digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Technical specifications of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 230 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported 56 yes S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before the parameters were set. Supports time stamping yes Number of inputs 4 Line length, shielded max. 200 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 01ATEX1057 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 V DC Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC Reverse voltage protection yes Number of inputs which can be activated simultaneously 4 Electrical isolation between the channels and backplane bus yes between the channels and load voltage L+ yes between the channels yes between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area between the channels and backplane bus DC 60 V AC 30 V between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels 300 VDC 250 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 2500 V DC Channels to each other with 2500 V DC S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 57 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 500 V DC Current input from backplane bus max. 80 mA from load voltage L+ max. 50 mA Module power loss typical 1.1 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status indication Inputs green LED per channel Interrupts Process interrupt Configurable Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Group fault indication red LED (SF) Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic functions readout possible monitoring for short-circuit I > 8.5 mA Wire break I 0.1 mA Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1057 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values of input circuits (per channel) U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 10 V I0 (short-circuit current) max. 14.1 mA P0 (load power) max. 33.7 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 100 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 3 F Um (fault voltage) max. DC 60V AC 30V Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60C Data for sensor selection To DIN EN 60947-5-6 or IEC 60947-5-6 Input current at signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA at signal "0" 0.35 to 1.2 mA Time/frequency Interrupt conditioning time for Interrupt conditioning only max. 250 s Interrupt and diagnostic conditioning max. 250 s Input delay (EV) 58 Configurable yes Nominal value type 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Configuration in RUN (CiR) If you use the Configuration in RUN function, the following special feature occurs. SF LED is lit: If a diagnostic event was pending before you started to reassign parameters, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM or module) may be lit even though the diagnostic event has been cleared and the module is operating properly. Remedy: Only make new parameter settings when there is no diagnostic event pending on the module, or Inserting and removing modules Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR) ...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916). See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) 2.2.2 Parameterization Parameterization You set the parameters of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR in STEP 7. You must implement the settings in CPU STOP mode. The parameters set in this way are stored in the CPU during transfer from PG to S7-300. These parameters are transferred to the digital module during the status change from STOP-->RUN. You can also change some parameters in the user program with SFC 55 to 57. The parameters for the 2 parameterization alternatives are subdivided into: static parameters dynamic parameters S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 59 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters. Table 2-1 Static and dynamic parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Parameter can be set with CPU operating status static Programming Devices STOP dynamic Programming Devices STOP dynamic SFCs 55 to 57 in user program RUN Default settings The SM 321, DI 4 x NAMUR features default settings for diagnostics, interrupts etc.. These defaults apply to digital input modules which were not parameterized in STEP 7. Configurable characteristics The characteristics of the SM 321, DI 4 x NAMUR can be parameterized with the following parameter blocks: Basic settings Diagnostics Process interrupts Channel group allocation The table shows the allocation of the 4 channels to the channel groups of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR. Table 2-2 Allocation of 4 digital input channels to the 4 channel groups of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Channel Allocated channel group Channel 0 Channel group 0 Channel 1 Channel group 1 Channel 2 Channel group 2 Channel 3 Channel group 3 Parameters of the digital input module The table below provides an overview of the parameters of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR and shows what parameters are static or dynamic and can be used for the module as a whole or for a channel group. 60 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Table 2-3 Parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Parameter SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Range of val ues Default Type of Effective range Basic settings Input delay (ms) 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 3 static Module Process interrupt enable yes/no no dynamic Module Enable diagnostic interrupt yes/no no dynamic Module Wire-break monitoring yes/no no static Short-circuit to M yes/no no static Channel group with leading edge yes/no no dynamic at trailing edge yes/no no dynamic Diagnostics Channel group Process interrupts Channel group Channel group Input delay The table below shows the programmable input delay times of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR and their tolerances. Table 2-4 2.2.3 Delay times of input signal for SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Input delay Tolerance 0.1 ms 75 to 150 s 0.5 ms 0.4 to 0.8 ms 3 ms (default) 2.8 to 3.5 ms 15 ms 14.5 to 15.5 ms 20 ms 19 to 21 ms Diagnostic messages Introduction You can use the diagnostic function to determine whether signal acquisition takes place without errors. Parameterizing diagnostics You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 61 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Diagnostic evaluation We need to distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages when analyzing diagnostics data. Programmable diagnostic messages such as "wire break" or "short-circuit to M" are only output if diagnostics data analysis was enabled at the "wire break" or "short-circuit to M" parameters. Non-configurable diagnostic messages are general, i.e. independent of parameterization. A diagnostic signal results in a diagnostic interrupt being triggered providing the diagnostic interrupt has been enabled by way of parameterization. Irrespective of the parameterization, known module errors always result in the SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status (at POWER ON). Exception: The SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED light in the event of a wire break only when parameterization is enabled. Diagnostics of the digital input module The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic messages generated by SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR. You enable the diagnostics functions in STEP 7. The diagnostics information refers to either the channel groups or the entire module. Table 2-5 Diagnostic messages of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Diagnostic message Wire break Effective range of diagnostics Configurable Channel group Yes Module No Short-circuit to M incorrect parameters in module Module not configured external auxiliary voltage missing No internal auxiliary voltage Fuse blown Time watchdog tripped EPROM error RAM error CPU error Hardware interrupt lost Reading out diagnostic messages You can read the system diagnostics data in STEP 7. You can read detailed diagnostic messages from the module in the user program with SFC 59 of SFC 53. 62 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Causes of error and remedies The table below provides a list of possible causes and corresponding corrective measures for individual diagnostic messages. However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output the relevant programmable diagnostic messages. Table 2-6 Diagnostic messages as well as their causes and remedies in SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Diagnostic message Short-circuit to M (I > 8.5 mA) Possible fault causes Short-circuit between the two encoder Eliminate the short-circuit lines with contacts as sensor 1 k series resistor not fitted in line to contact Wire break (I 0.1 m A) Corrective measures Connect 1 k resistor directly at con tact in line Conductor break between module and NAMUR sensor Connect line with contact as sensor (wire break monitoring enabled) 10 k resistor not fitted or interrupted directly at contact with contact as sensor (without moni disable channel by parameterization "di toring) agnostics wire break" Channel not used (open) Incorrect parame ters in module Invalid parameters loaded in module by means of SFC Check parameterization of module and re-load valid parameters Module not config ured Module not supplied with parameters Include module in parameterization external auxiliary voltage missing No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply No internal auxiliary voltage No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply module-internal fuse defective Replace module Fuse blown module-internal fuse defective Replace module Time watchdog trip ped partially high electromagnetic interfer Eliminate interference sources ence Module defective EPROM error RAM error Replace module partially high electromagnetic interfer Eliminate interference sources and ence switch CPU supply voltage OFF/ON CPU error Module defective Hardware interrupt lost The CPU is unable to process succes Change interrupt processing in CPU sive hardware interrupts at this rate and reparameterize module if necessary S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Replace module 63 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) 2.2.4 Interrupts Introduction In principle, a differentiation is made between the following interrupts: Diagnostic interrupt Process interrupt Parameterizing interrupts You program the interrupts in STEP 7. Default setting The interrupts are inhibited by way of default. Diagnostic interrupt The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such as a wire break or short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt module (OB82). Process interrupt The module supports triggering of process interrupts for each channel at the positive, negative or both edges of the signal transition, depending on parameter settings. You can determine which of the channels has triggered the interrupt from the local data of the OB 40 in the user program. Active process interrupts trigger process interrupt execution (OB 40) at the CPU, i.e. the CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class. If there are no higher priority classes pending processing, the stored interrupts (of all modules) are processed one after the other corresponding to the order in which they occurred. Process interrupt lost Events (edge transitions) at a channel are written to the process interrupt stack and trigger a process interrupt. The event is lost if a further event is generated at this channel before the CPU has acknowledged the process interrupt, i.e. before OB 40 was executed. This status triggers a "process interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt. The relevant diagnostics interrupt must be enabled. Further events at this channel are not logged until interrupt processing is completed for this channel. 64 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0) Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state The input values of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR are dependent on the supply voltage and on the operating status of the CPU. The table below provides an overview of these dependencies. Table 2-7 Dependencies of the input values for CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR Operating status CPU POWER ON RUN STOP POWER OFF - Supply voltage L+ at digital module Input value of the digital mod ule L+ applied Process value L+ not applied > 20 ms 0 signal L+ applied Process value No L+ 0 signal L+ applied - No L+ - Failure of the supply voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR is always indicated by the SFLED on the front of the module and additionally entered in diagnostics. In the event of the module supply voltage L+ failing, the input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the "0" signal is transferred to the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not influence the process value, but are reported by diagnostics interrupt and at the group error LED. Interrupt-triggering channels The relevant process interrupt-triggering channel is logged in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable of the start information of OB40. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in DWORD 8 of local data. Byte Variable Data type 6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#0 Address of the interrupt-triggering module As of 8 OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD see the fol lowing fig ure Indication of the interrupt-triggering inputs S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Description 65 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) /% /% /% /% %LWQR /' 5HVHUYHG (GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO (GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO (GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO (GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO Image 2-3 Start Information of OB40: which event has triggered the process interrupt 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) 2.3.1 Features and technical specifications Order Number 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0 Features SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA has the following properties: 4 outputs - electrically isolated from the bus - electrically isolated from each other suitable for - intrinsically safe valves - acoustic interrupts - indicators configurable diagnostics configurable diagnostic interrupt configurable default output Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs Fault indications = red LEDs for - group fault indication (SF) - channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3) 66 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Intrinsic safety of outputs in accordance with 60079-11 2-wire actuator connection Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA 60 '2['&9P$ / &+ &+ 6) 2XWSXW ) 2XWSXW ) [ [ >([LE@,,& 2XWSXW ) 2XWSXW ) &+ &+ 0 ; 6'$% :LULQJGLDJUDP &KDQQHOQXPEHU 6)JURXSIDXOW>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@ Image 2-4 Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 67 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. Block diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA 0RQLWRULQJ /PRGXOH 0RQLWRULQJ LQWHUQDOVXSSO\ YROWDJH / 9ORDGYROWDJH 9 0 /RJLF 9 :LUHEUHDN (YDO XDWLRQ 6KRUWFLUFXLW WR0 6 EDFN SODQH EXV /RJLF &KDQQHO 9 &KDQQHO 9 &KDQQHO 9 &KDQQHO *URXSHUURU GLVSOD\ 6) UHG Image 2-5 68 6WDWXV GLVSOD\ JUHHQ &KDQQHOIDXOW GLVSOD\ )) UHG Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 230 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR specify the output value which was valid before the parameter ization Number of outputs 4 Line length, shielded max. 200 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 01ATEX1059 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 V DC Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC Reverse voltage protection yes Total current of outputs horizontal arrangement up to 60 C no restrictions vertical installation to 40 C no restrictions Electrical isolation between the channels and backplane bus yes between the channels and load voltage L+ yes between the channels yes between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area between the channels and backplane bus DC 60 V AC 30 V between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area between the channels and backplane bus S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 300 VDC 250 VAC 69 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels 300 VDC 250 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 2500 V DC Channels to each other with 2500 V DC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 500 V DC Current input from backplane bus Max. 85 mA from load voltage L+ (at rated data) max. 160 mA Module power loss typical 3 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status indication Outputs green LED per channel Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt configurable Diagnostic functions Group fault indication red LED (SF) Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic functions readout possible monitoring for short-circuit I > 10 mA (10%) Wire break I 0.15 mA Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1059 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel) U0 (no-load output voltage) max.25.2 V I0 (short-circuit current) max. 70 mA P0 (load power) max. 440 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 6.7 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 90 nF Um (fault voltage) max. DC 60V AC 30V Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60C Data for sensor selection Outputs No-load voltage UA0 DC 24 V 5% Internal resistance RI 390 5% Curve vertices E 70 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Voltage UE DC 19 V 10% Current IE 10 mA 10% Parallel wiring of two outputs for redundant activation of a load not possible for increasing power possible Switching frequency at resistive load 100 Hz at inductive load (LLo) 100 Hz Short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronic Response threshold Curve vertex E Block diagram RL Ri URL G UA RA URA IRA G Generator Ri Internal resistor RL Line resistor RA Load resistor UAO No-load voltage UA Output voltage URL Voltage drop at load resistor URA Output power at load U0 max. output voltage I0 max. output voltage IRA Load current Output characteristic S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 71 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Block diagram 8 82 8$2 8$ 85/ 85$ ( 2YHUORDG FORFNHG ,5$ ,2 , 5DQJHRXWVLGHVDIHW\UHOHYDQWOLPLWV /RDGRXWSXWSRZHU E Curve vertice (UE, IE) UE = 19V 10% IE = 10 mA 10% Output current electronically clocked at overload. Clock ratio 1:25 Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR) ...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916). See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) 2.3.2 Parameterization Parameterization You program the parameters in STEP 7. You must implement the settings in CPU STOP mode. During transfer from the PG to the S7-300, the parameters set in this way are stored in the CPU and then transferred by the CPU to the digital module. 72 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Alternatively, you can also change several parameters in the user program with SFCs 55 to 57 (see STEP 7-online help). The parameters for the 2 parameterization alternatives are subdivided into: static parameters dynamic parameters The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters. Table 2-8 Static and dynamic parameters Parameter can be set with CPU operating status static Programming Devices STOP dynamic Programming Devices STOP SFCs 55 to 57 in user program RUN Default settings The digital output features default settings for diagnostics, substitute values, etc.. These defaults apply to digital modules which were not parameterized in STEP 7. Configurable characteristics The characteristics of the SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA can be parameterized with the following parameter blocks: Basic settings Diagnostics Channel groups allocation The table below shows the allocation of the 4 channels to the 4 channel groups of digital output. Table 2-9 Assignment of the four channels to the four channel groups of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA Channel Allocated channel group Channel 0 Channel group 0 Channel 1 Channel group 1 Channel 2 Channel group 2 Channel 3 Channel group 3 Parameters of the digital output module The table below provides an overview of the parameters and shows what parameters: are static or dynamic, can be used for the module as a whole or for a channel group. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 73 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) Table 2-10 Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA Parameter SM 322; DO 4 x DC 24V/10 mA / or 15V/20 mA Range of val ues Default Type of Effective range Basic settings Enable diagnostic interrupt yes/no no dynamic module retain last valid value yes/no no dynamic Module Switch to substitute value yes/no yes dynamic Module 0/1 0 dynamic Module yes/no no static yes/no no static Channel group yes/no no static Substitute value Diagnostics Short-circuit to M Wire break monitoring Supply voltage fault 1 Channel group Channel group If wire break diagnostic enable is not parameterized there will be no indication by the channel fault LED in the event of a wire break. 1 2.3.3 Diagnostic messages Introduction You can use the diagnostic function to determine whether signal output takes place without errors. Parameterizing diagnostics You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7. Diagnostic evaluation We need to distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages when analyzing diagnostics data. Programmable diagnostic messages such as "short-circuit to M" are only output if diagnostics data analysis was enabled at the "wire break" or "shortcircuit to M" parameters. Non-configurable diagnostic messages are general, i.e. independent of parameterization. A diagnostic signal results in a diagnostic interrupt being triggered providing the diagnostic interrupt has been enabled by way of parameterization. Irrespective of the parameterization, known module errors always result in the SF LED or the corresponding channel fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status (at POWER ON). Exception: 74 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) The SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED light in the event of a wire break only when parameterization is enabled. Diagnostics of digital output module The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic messages. You enable the diagnostics functions in STEP 7. The diagnostic information refers to either the individual channels or the entire module. Table 2-11 Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnostics Configurable Channel group Yes Module No Short-circuit to M Wire break No-load voltage Module not configured external auxiliary voltage missing No internal auxiliary voltage Fuse blown Time watchdog tripped EPROM error RAM error CPU error Wire break detection A wire break is detected at a current 0.15 mA. Reading out diagnostic messages You can read the system diagnostics data in STEP 7. You can read detailed diagnostic messages from the module in the user program with SFC 59 of SFC 53. Causes of error and remedies The table below provides a list of possible causes, marginal conditions for fault recognition and corresponding corrective measures for individual diagnostic messages. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 75 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0) However, be aware that error detection must be programmed accordingly at the modules in order to output programmable diagnostic messages. Table 2-12 Diagnostic messages as well as their causes of error and remedies for the SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA Diagnostic message Short-circuit to M Wire break Possible fault causes Corrective measures only when output at "1" output overload Eliminate overload Short-circuit between the two output lines Eliminate the short-circuit only when output at "1" Break in line between module and actuator Connect line Channel not used (open) disable channel by parameter ization "diagnostics wire break" No-load voltage only when output at "1" Failure of internal channel supply voltage Replace module Incorrect parameters in module general Invalid parameters loaded in module by means of SFC Check parameterization of module and re-load valid pa rameters Module not configured general Invalid parameters loaded in module by means of SFC Check parameterization of module and re-load valid pa rameters external auxiliary volt age missing general No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply No internal auxiliary voltage general No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply Fuse blown general module-internal fuse defective Replace module Time watchdog trip ped general partially high electromagnetic interference Eliminate interference sour ces and switch CPU supply voltage OFF/ON Module defective Replace module EPROM error CPU error 2.3.4 Fault recog nition at module-internal fuse defective Replace module Interrupts Introduction The digital output can trigger a diagnostic interrupt. Parameterizing interrupts Interrupts can be configured in STEP 7. Default setting The interrupts are inhibited by way of default. 76 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Diagnostic interrupt The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such as short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt module (OB82). Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state The output values are dependent on the supply voltages and CPU operating status. The table below provides an overview of these dependencies. Table 2-13 Dependencies of output values on the CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA Operating status CPU POWER ON RUN STOP POWER OFF - Supply voltage L+ at digital mod ule Output value of the digital mod ule L+ applied CPU value No L+ 0 signal L+ applied Substitute value / last value Substitute value for 0-signal is default setting No L+ 0 signal L+ applied 0 signal No L+ 0 signal Failure of the supply voltage is always indicated by the SF LED on the front of the module and additionally entered in diagnostics. 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) 2.4.1 Features and technical specifications Order Number 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 77 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Features SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA has the following properties: 4 outputs - electrically isolated from the bus - electrically isolated from each other suitable for - intrinsically safe valves - acoustic interrupts - indicators configurable diagnostics configurable diagnostic interrupt configurable default output Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs Fault indications = red LEDs for - group fault indication (SF) - channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3) Intrinsic safety of outputs in accordance with 60079-11 2-wire actuator connection Configuration in Run (CiR) supported 78 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA 60 '2['&9P$ / &+ &+ 6) 2XWSXW ) 2XWSXW ) [ 2XWSXW ) 2XWSXW ) [ &+ &+ 0 ; 5'$% :LULQJGLDJUDP &KDQQHOQXPEHU 6)JURXSIDXOW>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@ Image 2-6 Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module. Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 79 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Block diagram of the SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA 0RQLWRULQJ /PRGXOH 0RQLWRULQJ LQWHUQDOVXSSO\ YROWDJH / 9ORDGYROWDJH 9 0 /RJLF 9 :LUHEUHDN (YDO XDWLRQ 6KRUWFLUFXLW WR0 6 EDFN SODQH EXV /RJLF &KDQQHO 9 &KDQQHO 9 &KDQQHO 9 &KDQQHO *URXSHUURU GLVSOD\ 6) UHG Image 2-7 6WDWXV GLVSOD\ JUHHQ &KDQQHOIDXOW GLVSOD\ )) UHG Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 230 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported 80 yes S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR return the output value which was valid before the parame terization Number of outputs 4 Line length, shielded max. 200 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 01ATEX1056 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 1. 5 V DC Rated load voltage L+ 2. 24 V DC Reverse voltage protection yes Total current of outputs horizontal arrangement up to 60 C no restrictions vertical installation to 40 C no restrictions Electrical isolation between the channels and backplane bus yes between the channels and load voltage L+ yes between the channels yes between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC 30 VAC between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels 300 VDC 250 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 with 2500 V DC 81 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Channels to each other with 2500 V DC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 500 V DC Current input from backplane bus Max. 85 mA from load voltage L+ (at rated data) max. 160 mA Module power loss typical 3 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status indication Outputs green LED per channel Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Group fault indication red LED (SF) Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic functions readout possible monitoring for short-circuit I > 20.5 mA (10%) Wire break I 0.15 mA Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1056 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel) U0 (no-load output voltage) max.15.75 V I0 (short-circuit current) max. 85 mA P0 (load power) max. 335 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 5 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 478 nF Um (fault voltage) max. 60 VDC 30 VAC Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60C Data for sensor selection Outputs No-load voltage UA0 DC 15 V 5% Internal resistance RI 200 5% Curve vertices E Voltage UE DC 10 V 10% Current IE 20.5 mA 10% Parallel wiring of two outputs for redundant activation of a load not possible for increasing power possible Switching frequency 82 at resistive load 100 Hz at inductive load (L < Lo) 100 Hz S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0) Short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronic Response threshold Curve vertex E Block diagram RL Ri URL G UA RA URA IRA G Generator Ri Internal resistance RL Line resistor RA Load resistor UAO No-load voltage UA Output voltage URL Voltage drop at load resistor URA Output power at load U0 max. output voltage I0 max. output voltage IRA Load current Output characteristic 8 82 8$2 8$ 85/ 85$ ( 2YHUORDG FORFNHG ,5$ ,2 , 5DQJHRXWVLGHVDIHW\UHOHYDQWOLPLWV /RDGRXWSXWSRZHU E Curve vertice (UE, IE) UE = 10 V 10% IE = 20.5 mA 10% Output current electronically clocked at overload. Clock ratio 1:25 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 83 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR) ...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916). See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) 2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules Structure and contents of the diagnostic data records The diagnostics data for a module is stored in data records 0 and 1. Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of the module. Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data also stored in data record 0, plus additional module-specific diagnostics data that describe the status of a channel of the module. 84 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules Byte 0 to 3 (data records 0 and 1) %\WH 0RGXOHHUURU ,QWHUQDOHUURU ([WHUQDOHUURU &KDQQHOHUURU H[WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ 0RGXOHQRWSDUDPHWHUL]HG ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHULQWKHPRGXOH %\WH 0RGXOHFODVVGLJLWDOPRGXOH &KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH %\WH 2SHUDWLQJPRGH 581 6723 &\FOHPRQLWRULQJWULSSHG ,QWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJHRIWKHPRGXOHIDLOHG %\WH 3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH (3520HUURU 5$0HUURU )XVHEORZQ 3URFHVVLQWHUUXSWORVW S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 85 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules Byte 4 to byte 6 infoblock (data record 1) Bytes 4 to 6 form the infoblock with the information about channel type, length of diagnostics information and the length of the channels. %\WH &KDQQHOW\SH%'LJLWDOLQSXWPRGXOH &KDQQHOW\SH%'LJLWDORXWSXWPRGXOH %\WH %\WH %\WH 1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFVELWV WKDWWKHPRGXOHRXWSXWVSHUFKDQQHO% 1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVRIWKHVDPHW\SH LQWKHPRGXOH% &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO 7KHFKDQQHOHUURUYHFWRULVIROORZHGE\WKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD %\WHVWR FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUFKDQQHO 6KRUWFLUFXLWWR0 :LUHEUHDN H[WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ QRWIRU(65'$% 86 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 3 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.1 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input and Output Values Conversion of analog values The CPU processes the analog values only in binary form. Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form. Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal. Analog value representation The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values with the same rated range. The analog values are represented as two's complement. Table 3-1 Characteristics of Analog Modules Resolution Analog value Bit number 15 14 Bit significance sig 2 n 14 13 12 11 10 9 2 2 2 2 2 13 12 11 10 8 9 2 7 8 2 6 7 5 2 6 4 2 5 3 2 4 2 2 3 1 2 2 0 2 1 20 sign The sign of the analog value is always in bit number 15: "0" + "1" - 3.1.2 General information about the display of analog values within the measuring ranges of analog inputs Introduction This section contains the tables of digitized analog values for the measurement ranges of analog modules S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 87 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Reading measured value tables The tables represent the digitized analog values of the various measurement ranges of analog input modules. As the binary notation of analog values is always the same, these tables only contain a comparison of measuring ranges with the units. Measured value resolution Deviating from this, a Sigma Delta AD converter is used with the analog input modules described in the manual. Irrespective of the configurable integration time, this converter always makes available the maximum representable 15 Bit +sign. Lower resolution ratings than indicated in the specifications are due to conversion noise based on the shorter integration times (2.5, 16/2/3, 20 ms). The different integration times do not influence the numeric notation of measured values. The number of stable bits is specified in the technical specifications. The number of stable bits is the resolution at which, despite noise, the "no missing code"characteristics of the AD converter are guaranteed. The bits that are no longer stable at shorter integration times are marked with "x" in the following tables. Table 3-2 Representation of the smallest stable unit of the analog value Stable bits (+ sign) decimal Smallest stable unit hexadecimal High-Byte Analog value Low-Byte 9 64 40H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01xxxxxx 10 32 20H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 001xxxxx 12 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx 13 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx 15 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001 Noise-prone bits At a constant input voltage, noise causes distribution of the supplied value by more than 1 digit. In the majority of cases, these "unsteady" values can be used as they are. In any case, this is the most effective option when subsequent processing has integral action characteristics (integrator, controller, etc.) in any form whatsoever. If this "unsteady state" is undesirable (e.g. for displays), you can mask out the "x" bits round up to "stable" bits filter the successive values When choosing these options, you first have to scan the values in order to prevent any change or filtering of the coding of invalid measured values (-32768 / 8000H and 32767 / 7FFFH). 88 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.3 Analog value notation of the voltage measurement ranges Voltage measuring ranges 25 mV, 50 mV, 80 mV, 250 mV, 500 mV and 1 V. Table 3-3 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (voltage measuring range) Measuring ranges 3.1.4 Units 1V decimal Location 25 mV 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV hexadec imal > 29.397 > 58.794 > 94.071 >293.96 >587.94 > 1.1750 32767 7FFFH Overflow 29.397 58.794 94.071 293.96 587.94 1.1750 32511 7EFFH : : : : : : : : Over range 25.001 50.002 80.003 250.02 500.02 1.0001 27649 6C01H 25.000 50.000 80.000 250.00 500.00 1.0000 27648 6C00H 18.750 37.500 60.000 187.50 375.00 0.7500 20736 5100H : : : : : : : : - 18.750 - 37.500 - 60.000 - 187.50 - 375.00 0.7500 -20736 AF00H - 25.000 - 50.000 - 80.000 - 250.00 - 500.00 - 1.0000 -27648 9400H - 25.001 - 50.002 - 80.003 - 250.01 - 500.02 - 1.0001 -27649 93FFH : : : : : : : : - 29.398 - 58.796 - 94.074 - 293.98 - 587.96 - 1.1750 -32512 8100H <29.398 <- 58.796 <- 94.074 <- 293.98 <- 587.96 <- 1.1750 -32768 8000H Rated range Under range Under flow Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges 0 mA to 20 mA and 4 mA to 20 mA current measuring ranges Table 3-4 Measuring range Displaying the digitized measured values SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4.... .20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... . 20mA HART analog input modules Measuring range Units Location Decimal Hexadeci mal from from 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA > 23.515 >22.810 32767 7FFFH 23.515 22.810 32511 7EFFH : : : : 20.0007 20.0005 27649 6C01H S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Overflow Overrange 89 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Measuring range Measuring range from from 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Units Location Decimal Hexadeci mal 20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H 14.998 16.000 20736 5100H : : : : 0.0 4.000 0 0H <0.0 2 3.9995 -1 FFFFH Rated range 3.800 -345 FEA7H 3.600 -691 FD4DH Wire break limit I 3.60 mA in accordance with NAMUR 1 Underrange : : : 1.1852 -4864 ED00H <1.1852 32767 7FFFH 03 58624 E500H Underflow NAMUR limits are evaluated only if wire break diagnostics is enabled. When wire break diagnostics is enabled, 7FFFH is output if the current value drops below 3.6 mA. If the value increases again to above 3.8 mA, the wire break signal is canceled and the current value is output again. 1 Negative measured values cannot be acquired. For analog values < 0 mA each display of the digital measured value of 0 mA remains. 2 If wire break monitoring is not enabled, the measured value can fall to 0 mA and the module returns E500H. 3 3.1.5 Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders Resistance sensor with measurement ranges 150 , 300 and 600 Table 3-5 90 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (resistance sensor) Measuring range 150 Measuring range 300 Measuring range 600 Units Location Deci mal Hexa deci mal > 176.383 > 352.767 > 705.534 32767 7FFFH 176.383 352.767 705.534 32511 7EFFH : : : : : 150.005 300.011 600.022 27649 6C01H Overflow Overrange 1 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Measuring range 150 Measuring range 300 Measuring range 600 Deci mal Units Hexa deci mal Location 150.000 300.000 600.000 27648 6C00H 112.500 225.000 450.000 20736 5100H : : : : : 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0H Rated range (negative values physically not possible) 1 3.1.6 The same degree of accuracy as in the rated range is guaranteed in the overrange. Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Standard temperature range of the sensor Pt 100, Pt 200 in accordance with DIN 43760 and IEC 751 Table 3-6 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range standard; Pt 100, Pt200) Temperature range standard 850 C decimal hexadecimal location Overflow Pt 100, Pt 200 in C > 1300.0 32767 7FFFH 1300.0 13000 32C8H : : : 850.1 8501 2135H 850.0 8500 2134H : : : -200.0 -2000 F830H -200.1 -2001 F82FH : : : -240.0 -2400 F6A0H < -240.0 -32768 8000H Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange2 Underflow The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The overrange has been extended to 1300C in order to be able to incorporate future technical developments of platinum thermal resistors (thermistors). It is not possible to specify the accuracy of this range. 1 2 The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The rise of the char acteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of this range. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 91 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.7 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Ni 100 Standard temperature range Ni 100 in accordance with DIN 43760 Table 3-7 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range standard; Ni 100) Temperature range standard decimal hex Location > 295.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 295.0 2950 686H : : : 250.1 2501 9C5H 250.0 2500 9C4H : : : -60.0 -600 FDA8H -60.1 -601 FDA7H : : : -105.0 -1050 FF97H < - 105.0 -32768 8000H Ni 100 in C Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange1 Underflow The characteristic of the Ni 100 sensor is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 3.1.8 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Climatic temperature range of the sensor Pt 100, Pt 200 in accordance with DIN 43760 and IEC 751 Table 3-8 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range climatic; Pt 100, Pt200) Climatic temperature range decimal hex Location > 325.12 32767 7FFFH Overflow 325.12 32512 7F00H : : : 276.49 27649 6C01H 276.48 27648 6C00H Pt 100, Pt 200 in C 92 : : : -200.00 -20000 B1E0 Overrange 1 Rated range S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Climatic temperature range decimal hex -200.01 -20001 B1E1 : : : -240.00 -24000 A240H < - 240.00 -32768 8000H Location Pt 100, Pt 200 in C Underrange2 Underflow The same degree of accuracy as in the rated range is guaranteed in the overrange Pt 100, Pt 200 climatic. 1 The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The rise of the char acteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 2 3.1.9 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Ni 100 Climatic temperature range Ni 100 in accordance with DIN 43760 The same value range as in the standard range of the Ni 100 sensor applies in the climatic range Ni 100 only with a higher resolution of 0.01C instead of 0.1C. Table 3-9 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range climatic Ni 100) Climatic temperature range decimal hex Location > 295.00 32767 7FFFH Overflow 295.00 29500 733CH : : : 250.01 25001 61A9H 250.00 25000 61A8H Ni 100 in C : : : -60.00 -6000 E890H -60.01 -6001 E88FH : : : -105.00 -10500 D6FCH < - 105.00 -32768 8000H Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange1 Underflow The characteristic of the Ni 100 sensor is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 93 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.10 Analog value representation for the temperature range type B Temperature range sensor type B The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-10 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type B) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 2070.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 2070.0 20700 50DCH : : : 1820.1 18201 4719H 1820.0 18200 4718H : : : Type B : : : 200.01 2000 7D0H : : : 0.0 0 0H -0.1 -1 FFFFH : : : -150.0 -1500 FF24H < -150.0 -32768 8000H Overrange 2 Rated range Underrange2 Underflow In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below FA24H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The module linearizes the range +1820 C to +200C for type B. The gradient of the curve deteriorates below +200C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached. 1 The characteristic curve of the type B thermocouple does not feature monotone characteristics in the temperature range between 0 and 40C. Values measured in this range cannot be allocated to a specific temperature. 2 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 94 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.11 Analog value representation for the temperature range type E Temperature range sensor type E The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-11 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type E) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 1200.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1200.0 12000 2EE0H : : : 1000.1 10001 2711H 1000.0 10000 2710H : : : : : : -1500 FA24H : : -150.0 1 : -270.0 -2700 F574H -270.1 -2701 F573H Overrange 2 Rated range Underrange2 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The module will linearize the range +1000 C to -150 C for type E. The gradient of the curve deteri orates below -150 C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the charac teristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached. 1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 2 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 95 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.12 Analog value representation for the temperature range type J Temperature range sensor type J The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-12 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type J) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 1360.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1360.0 13600 3520H : : : 1200.1 12001 2EE1H 1200.0 12000 2EE0H : : : : : : -210.0 -2100 F7CCH -210.1 -2101 F7CBH Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange1 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F31CH the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 3.1.13 Analog value representation for the temperature range type K Temperature range sensor type K The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-13 96 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type K) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 1622.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1622.0 16220 3F5CH : : : 1372.1 13721 3599H Overrange 2 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal 1372.0 13720 3598H : : : : : : -2200 F768H : : -220.0 1 : -270.0 -2700 F574H -270.1 -2701 F573H location Rated range Underrange2 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The module linearizes the range +1372 C to -220C for type K. The gradient of the curve deteriorates below -220C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached. 1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 2 3.1.14 Analog value representation for the temperature range type L Temperature range sensor type L The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-14 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type L) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 1150.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1150.0 13500 2CECH : : : 900.1 9001 2329H 900.0 9000 2328H : : : : : : -200.0 -2000 F830H -200.1 -2001 F82FH Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange1 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F380H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 97 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.15 Analog value representation for the temperature range type N Temperature range sensor type N The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-15 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type N) Temperature range inC decimal hexadecimal location > 1550.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1550.0 15500 3C8CH : : : 1300.1 13001 32C9H 1300.0 13000 32C8H : : : : : : -2200 F768H : : -220.0 1 : -270.0 -2700 F574H -270.1 -2701 F573H Overrange 2 Rated range Underrange2 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The module linearizes the range +1300 C to -220C for type N. The gradient of the curve deteriorates below -220C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached. 1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 2 98 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation 3.1.16 Analog value representation for the temperature range type R Temperature range sensor type R The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-16 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type R) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 2019.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 2019.0 20190 4EDEH : : : 1769.1 17691 451BH 1769.0 17690 451AH : : : : : : -50.0 -500 FE0CH -50.1 -501 FE0BH : : : -170.0 -1700 F95CH < -170.0 -32768 8000H Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange1 Underflow In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F95CH the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 3.1.17 Analog value representation for the temperature range type S Temperature range sensor type S The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-17 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type S) Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal location > 1850.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1850.0 18500 4844H : : : 1769.1 17691 451BH S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Overrange 1 99 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Temperature range in C decimal hexadecimal 1769.0 17690 451AH : : : : : : -50.0 -500 FE0CH -50.1 -501 FE0BH : : : -170.0 -1700 F95CH < -170.0 -32768 8000H location Rated range Underrange1 Underflow In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F95CH the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 3.1.18 Representation of the analog values of the temperature range type T Temperature range sensor type T The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-18 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type T) Temperature range in C decimal hex Location > 540.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 540.0 5400 1518H : : : 400.1 4001 0FA1H 400.0 4000 0FA0H : : : : : : -230.0 100 -2300 F704H : : : -270.0 -2700 F574H 1) Overrange 2 Rated range S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.1 Analog value representation Temperature range in C decimal hex Location -270.1 -2701 F573H Underrange2 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The module will linearize the range +400 C to -230C for type T. The gradient of the curve deteriorates below -230C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached. 1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 2 3.1.19 Analog value representation for the temperature range type U Temperature range sensor type U The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584. Table 3-19 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range, type U) Temperature range inC decimal hexadecimal location > 850.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 850.0 8500 2134H : : : 600.1 6001 0FA1H 600.0 6000 0FA0H : : : : : : -200.0 -2000 F830H -200.1 -2001 F82FH Overrange 1 Rated range Underrange1 In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range (e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F380H the analog input module signals underflow and outputs 8000H. The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy of these ranges. 1 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 101 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.2 General information on wiring technology 3.1.20 Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs Current output ranges from 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Table 3-20 Representation of analog output range of analog output modules (current output ranges) Output range Output range 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0.0 Units Location decimal hex 0.0 32512 7F00H 23.515 22.81 32511 7EFFH : : : : 20.0007 20.005 27649 6C01H 20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H : : : : 0.0 4.000 0 0H 0.0 3.9995 -1 FFFFH : : : 0.0 - 6912 E500H 0.0 - 6913 E4FFH : : - 32768 8000H Overflow Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow Note For the analog output SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4 ... 20mA the linearity can be reduced in the overrange for load impedances > 425 . 3.2 General information on wiring technology Abbreviations used The diagrams in the next section show the various options of wiring encoders. The abbreviations used in the diagrams have the following meanings: 102 Abbreviation Meaning IC+ Positive terminal of the constant current output IC- Negative terminal of the constant current output M+ Positive measuring line M- Negative measuring line UISO Potential difference between the inputs and grounding terminal M UCM Potential difference between the inputs S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs Abbreviation Meaning L+ 24 VDC power supply terminal M 24 VDC power supply ground terminal P5V Supply voltage of module logic Minternal Module logic ground UV Electrically isolated supply voltage of the compensating box L0+ to L3+ Electrically isolated transducer supply per channel UM Measurement voltage RS Measuring resistor UV+; UV- External supply voltage of the transducer QI0- to QI3- Analog outputs current (output current) M0- to M3- Reference potentials of the analog output circuit RL Resistance of the load/actuator UISO Potential difference between the reference potential of channels M0- to M3-, or between the channels and the M terminal of the CPU See also Wiring transducers to analog inputs (Page 103) Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (Page 106) Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors (Page 111) 3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs Transducers The analog input modules support the connection of different transducers to suit a specific type of measurement: Voltage sensor Current sensor as - 2-wire transducer - 4-wire transducer Resistance sensor Lines for analog signals Shielded conductors twisted in pairs are used for the analog signals. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 103 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs Electrically isolated analog input modules A galvanic connection of measuring circuit ground M- to CPU ground M does not exist on electrically isolated analog input modules. Electrically isolated analog input modules are used if there is any risk of potential difference VISO developing between reference ground M- of the measuring circuit and CPU ground M. Take appropriate measures to prevent any overshoot of the permitted potential difference VISO. Interconnect the reference potential M- of the measuring circuit with reference potential M of the CPU if the permitted value of VISO is actually exceeded or if you cannot precisely determine the potential difference. This also refers to unused inputs. Electrical isolation between channels The channels are electrically isolated by means of separate power transformers, and the signals are transferred via optocoupler. This electrical isolation tolerates high potential differences between the channels. In addition, very good values are achieved with regard to interference voltage rejection and crosstalk between the channels. SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA features electrically isolated channels. To facilitate channel isolation, The SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD is equipped with optical semiconductor multiplexers that ensure a high common-mode range of UCM DC 60 V. This represents a virtually equivalent solution in practical applications. Higher potential differences can be tolerated if the modules are used to process signals from the non-Ex area. Insulated transducers Insulated transducers are not wired to local ground potential. These transducers can be operated in electrically isolated mode. Potential differences VCM (static or dynamic) may develop between the input channels as a result of local conditions or interference. However, such potential differences may not exceed the permitted value of VCM. If there is a possibility that the permissible value may be exceeded, the M- terminals of the input channels must be interconnected. Interconnect M- of the input channels and M of the CPU if you expect any violation of VISO limits (inputs to the backplane bus). The diagram below shows the basic wiring of insulated transducers to an electrically isolated analog input module. 104 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs 39 0LQWHUQDO 0 0 1 8&0 8,62 0 0 $'8 2 8,62 3 &38 0 / 0 4 Image 3-1 Insulated transducers Logic Backplane bus Ground bus Connection of insulated transducers to an isolated analog input module Non-insulated transducers Non-insulated transducers are wired to local ground potential. Potential differences VCM (static or dynamic) may develop between locally distributed measuring points as a result of local conditions or interference. Install equipotential conductors between the measuring points in order to avoid such potential differences. The diagram below shows the basic wiring of non-insulated transducers to an electrically isolated analog input module. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 105 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD 39 0LQWHUQDO 1 0 0 8&0 0 0 $'8 2 3 0D[ 8 8 &0 8,62 8,62 &38 0 / 0 5 4 Non-insulated transducers Logic Backplane bus Ground bus Equipotential conductor Image 3-2 Connection of non-insulated transducers to an electrically isolated analog input module See also Shielding (Page 33) Using thermocouples (Page 112) 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Options of wiring thermocouples The diagrams below show the various options of wiring thermocouples with external or internal compensation. The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the relevant chapters also apply to these circuits. 106 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Thermocouples with compensation box All thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of a module and which have the same reference junction compensate as follows. The thermocouples which use a compensation box must be of the same type. Each of the thermocouples can be grounded at any arbitrary point. 1 2 39 0 3 0 &+ 0 7 $'8 0 &+ 4 5 0 0 &+ 0 6 89 Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple) Reference junction Supply conductor (copper) Logic Backplane bus Compensation box with reference junction temperature of 0 C Thermocouple Image 3-3 Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation box to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Thermocouples with direct looping-in of compensation box The compensation box can be directly interconnected with the measuring circuit if the wiring of all thermocouples is electrically isolated. Compensation channel CH 7 is thus not required and is now available as additional measuring input. The "Thermocouples with linearization and 0C compensation" type of measurement must be set for all channels. In doing so, the thermocouples that use a compensation box must be of the same type. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 107 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD 1 2 39 0 3 0 &+ 0 $'8 4 0 &+ 5 0 7 0 &+ 0 6 89 Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple) Reference junction Supply conductor (copper) Logic Backplane bus Compensation box with reference junction temperature of 0 C Thermocouple Image 3-4 Wiring of electrically isolated thermocouples to a compensation box and "0 C compensation" measurement type with analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Advantages When using a compensation box with a reference junction temperature of 0 C, the voltage corresponding to the reference junction temperature is subtracted directly. Channel 7 can be used as additional measuring channel in this circuit variant. The number of connecting cables between the compensation box and the analog input module is reduced. The faults, which are attributed to isolated compensation measurement do not occur. Conditions The thermocouples that are routed to the same compensation box must only be grounded once at one point. 108 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Thermocouples with temperature compensation at the terminals All eight inputs of the measuring channels are available if the thermocouples are wired via a reference junction regulated to 0 C or 50 C. 39 0LQWHUQDO 1 &+ 4 0 0 $'8 2 3 0 &+ 0 0 &+ 0 Supply conductor (copper) Logic Backplane bus Reference junction regulated to 0 C or 50 C Image 3-5 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Wiring of thermocouples to analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD via a reference junction regulated to 0C or 50C 109 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Thermocouples with thermal resistor compensation In this type of compensation, the terminal temperature of the reference junction is determined by a thermal resistance-type sensor in the climatic range. 1 39 0LQWHUQDO 2 39 0 &+ 0 &+ 0 0 $'8 3 4 0 3W 6 ,& &+ 0 ,& &+ ,& 0LQWHUQDO 5 Thermocouple Supply conductor (copper) Logic S7-300 backplane bus Reference junction e.g. Pt100 Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple) Image 3-6 Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation by means of thermal resistance-type sensors (Pt100, for example) Note The two last channels (channel 6 and 7) of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD are used for temperature compensation by means of a thermal resistor. 110 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.5 Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors Thermocouples with internal compensation The internal terminal temperature sensor must be used where thermocouples are wired directly or via compensating lines to the module. Each channel group can use one of the supported types of thermocouple independent of the other channel groups. 39 0LQWHUQDO 1 &+ 0 0 $'8 2 3 0 &+ 0 4 5 Image 3-7 3.5 Wiring of thermocouples with internal compensation to an electrically isolated analog input module Thermocouple Logic Backplane bus Internal recording of terminal temperature Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple) Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors Measurement The values of resistance thermometers and resistance transducers are measured using the 4wire technique. The resistance thermometers/resistance sensors are fed a constant current via terminals IC + and IC. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometers / transducers is measured at the M+ and M- terminals. This method returns a high accuracy of measurement results with 4-wire technology. Lines for analog signals Shielded lines twisted in pairs are used for analog signals. So as to reduce interference influence. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 111 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.6 Using thermocouples When using the 4-wire technique to connect resistance thermometers, wire the constant current line Ic+ and sense line M+ using one of the twisted pairs, and the second pair for Ic+ / M +. You will achieve a further improvement if you also twist these two twisted-pair wires with each other (star-quad). The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the relevant chapters also apply to these circuits. 39 0LQWHUQDO 0 ,& &+ 0 ,& &+ ,& $'8 1 2 0 ,& &+ 0 ,& &+ ,& Logic Backplane bus Image 3-8 Wiring of resistance thermometers to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD For 2- and 3-wire connections you need to insert corresponding bridges between the module terminals M+ and IC + or M- and IC - . However, certain losses of measurement accuracy must be expected when using such connections, because you cannot measure the voltage loss at the relevant feed lines. 3.6 Using thermocouples Installation of thermocouples A thermocouple consists of the pair of thermal elements (sensors) and of the mounting and terminal elements required. The thermocouple consists of two wire elements made of different metals or metal alloys which are joint at their ends by soldering or welding. The different material compounds return different thermocouple types such as K, J or N. The principle of measurement is the same for all thermocouple types. 112 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.6 Using thermocouples 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C Measuring point Thermocouple with positive and negative thermal elements Terminal Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple) Reference junction Copper conductor Thermal e.m.f. acquisition point Image 3-9 Measuring circuit with thermocouple Operating principle of thermocouples A difference of the temperature between the measuring point and the free ends of the thermocouple (terminal) generates a voltage at these electrodes, namely the thermal voltage. The value of this thermal voltage is determined by the temperature difference between the measuring point and the electrodes, and by the material combination of the pair of thermal elements. As the pair of thermal elements always records a temperature difference, the free ends of the thermocouple always have to be kept at a known temperature in order to determine the temperature at a measuring point. Extension to a reference junction The pair of thermal elements can be extended using compensating lines in order to interconnect these with a reference which has a known temperature. The material of the equalizing conductors has the same thermal e.m.f. as the wires of the thermocouple. The conductors leading from the reference junction up to the analog module are made of copper. Using thermostatically controlled terminal boxes It is possible to use temperature-compensated terminal boxes. Use boxes with reference junction temperatures of 0 C or 50 C when using thermostatically controlled terminal boxes. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 113 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.6 Using thermocouples Compensation of thermocouples External or internal compensation can be adopted depending on where (locally) you require the reference junction. In the case of external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction for thermocouples is taken into consideration by means of a compensation box or thermal resistor. In the case of internal compensation, the internal terminal temperature of the module is used for the comparison. External compensation The temperature of the reference junction can be compensated by means of a compensating circuit, e.g. by a compensation box. The compensation box contains a bridge circuit which is calibrated for a certain reference junction temperature (compensating temperature). The terminal connections for the ends of the equalizing conductor of the thermocouple form the reference junction. If the actual reference temperature deviates from the compensating temperature the temperature-dependent bridge resistance will change. A positive or negative compensation voltage is produced which is added to the thermal e.m.f. Compensation boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 C must be used for the purpose of compensating the analog input modules. A further external compensation option is to record the reference junction temperature with a thermal resistor in the climatic range (e.g. Pt 100). The following conditions must be observed: External compensation by means of a compensation box can only be carried out for one specific type of thermocouple. This means that all channels of this module operating with external compensation must be parameterized for the same type of thermocouple. Module diagnostic signals "incorrect parameters in module" and "reference channel error" for the corresponding channels (0..5) in the case of incorrect parameterization. The parameters of a channel group apply to both channels of this channel group (e.g. type of thermocouple, integration time, etc.) Internal compensation For the purposes of internal compensation, you can form the reference junction at the terminals of the analog input module. In this case, you must route the compensating conductors to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor senses the terminal temperature of the module. The thermocouples (also different types) connected to the module are compensated with this temperature. Note For the analog input module SM 331; SI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, the compensation box is connected to terminals 18 and 19. The thermal resistor is connected to terminals 16, 17, 18 and 19 in order to register the reference junction temperature. 114 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA 3.7 Connecting voltage sensors Wiring voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD 39 0LQWHUQDO 8 &+ 8 &+ 0 0 $'8 2 0 0 Logic Backplane bus Image 3-10 1 Wiring of voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the chapter "Wiring transducers to analog inputs" also apply to these circuits. 3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA Wiring current transducers as 2-wire and 4-wire transducer The next section describes the operation of transducers on analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA. The relevant analog channel supplies the electrically isolated and short circuit-proof transducer voltage L0+ to L3+ to the 2-wire transducer. The 2-wire transducer converts the input process variable into a current from 4 mA to 20 mA. 4-wire transducers feature a separate power supply which must be taken from an external PS module. The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the chapter "Wiring transducers to analog inputs" also apply to these circuits. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 115 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA 1 / 0 / , 08 4 P$ 80 0 0 $ 56 2 ' Transducer power supply Logic Backplane bus e.g. pressure, temperature Image 3-11 3 Wiring 2-wire transducers to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA HART analog input modules 1 / 0 / 8Y P$ 08 0 80 0 4 56 $ 2 3 ' 8Y Transducer power supply Logic Backplane bus e.g. pressure, temperature Image 3-12 116 Wiring 4-wire transducers with external power supply to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA HART analog input modules S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA 3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA Introduction The analog output modules can be used to supply loads/actuators with current. Lines for analog signals Shielded lines twisted in pairs are used for analog signals. So as to reduce interference influence. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends. Any potential difference between the cable ends may cause an equipotential current which interferes with the analog signals. In this case, the shield should only be grounded at one end of the line. Electrically isolated analog output modules Electrically isolated analog input modules do not have a galvanic connection between their reference ground M0- to M3- and CPU reference ground M. Electrically isolated analog input modules are used if there is any risk of potential difference d UISO developing between reference ground M0- to M3- of the analog circuit and reference ground M of the CPU. Take appropriate measures to prevent any overshoot of the permitted potential difference VISO. You should always interconnect the terminals M0- to M3- with the M terminal of the CPU if you expect any overshoot of permitted limits. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 117 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Wiring loads to a current output You must connect loads to an output current at, e.g., QI0 and the reference point M0- of the analog circuit. L+ M I QI0 0/4...20 mA 1 2 DAU RL M0- CPU UISO M L+ M 3 Backplane bus Logic Ground bus Image 3-13 Connection of loads to a current output of the electrically isolated analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules 3.10.1 Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog Input Channels Conversion time The conversion time is made up of the basic conversion time and additional processing times for wire break monitoring. The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method (integral action, successive approximation or sigma-delta method) of the analog input channel. In the case of integral action conversion, the integration time is included directly in the conversion time. The integration time influences the resolution. The integration times of the individual analog modules are specified in the respective chapter. You set up the conversion functions in STEP 7. 118 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Cycle time Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of digitized measured values to memory or to the S7-300 backplane bus is handled sequentially, i.e. the analog input channels are converted successively. The cycle time, i.e. the time required until an analog input value has been converted again, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module. The conversion time is based on channel groups when the analog input channels are combined in channel groups by means of parameterization. In the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 2 analog input channels are combined to form one channel group. You must therefore subdivide the cycle time into steps of 2. You should disable all unused analog input channels in your STEP 7 program in order to reduce cycle times. The diagram shows an overview of how the cycle time is made up for an n-channel analog input module. &RQYHUVLRQWLPHFKDQQHO &RQYHUVLRQWLPHFKDQQHO &\FOHWLPH &RQYHUVLRQWLPHFKDQQHOQ Image 3-14 3.10.2 Cycle time of an analog input module Conversion, Cycle, Transient Recovery and Response Times of Analog Output Channels Conversion time The conversion time of analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output values and digital/analog conversion. Cycle time In the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, conversion of the analog output channels takes place in parallel, i.e. on receipt of the data, all four analog output channels are converted simultaneously. The cycle time, i.e. the time required until an analog output value is re-converted, is constant and equals the conversion time. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 119 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Transient recovery time The transient recovery time (t2 to t3), i.e. the time from applying the converted value up to achieving the specified value at the analog output is dependent on load. In this context we have to distinguish between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads. Response time In the most unfavorable case, the response time (t1 to t3), i.e. the time from receiving the digital output values in the module up to obtaining the specified value at the analog output is the sum of the cycle time and transient recovery time. The most unfavorable case is when channel conversion begins just before transfer of a new output value. The digitized output values are connected simultaneously to all output channels. tA tE tZ t1 t3 tA Response time tZ Cycle time tE Transient recovery time t1 New digitized output value applied t2 Output value accepted and converted t3 Specified output value obtained Image 3-15 3.10.3 t2 Response time of the analog input channels Parameters of Analog Modules Parameterization You program the parameters of analog modules in STEP 7. These settings must then be transferred in STOP mode to the CPU. During the status change from STOP-->RUN, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules. You can also change some parameters in the user program with SFC 55. You can find out which parameters can be changed in this way in Appendix A of the S7-300, Modules Device Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8859629). Call SFC 56 and 57 when the CPU is in RUN in order to transfer the parameters set in STEP 7 to the analog module. The parameters are subdivided as follows for the 2 parameterization alternatives: static parameters and dynamic parameters 120 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters. Parameter Can be set with CPU operating status static Programming Devices STOP dynamic Programming Devices STOP SFC 55 in user program RUN Configurable characteristics The properties of the analog modules can be programmed in STEP 7 at the parameter blocks listed below: for input channels - Basic settings (enables) - Limits (process interrupt triggers) - Diagnostics - Measurement for output channels - Basic settings - Diagnostics - Default values - Output Parameters of analog input modules The tables provide an overview of the parameters for analog input modules and show what parameters are static or dynamic and can be set for the modules as a whole or for a channel group or a channel. Table 3-21 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Parameter Range of values Default setting Type of param eter Effective range dynamic Module Basic settings Enable Diagnostic interrupt yes/no no Process interrupt triggered by violation of limits yes/no no End-of-cycle process interrupt yes/no no Limit S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 121 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Parameter Range of values Default setting Type of param eter Effective range dynamic Channel static Channel group Upper limit from 32511 to -35512 32767 Lower limit from -32512 to 32511 -32768 Group diagnostics yes/no no with wire break monitoring yes/no no Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz dynamic Channel group Measurement type - deactivated Voltage dynamic Channel group 1V dynamic Channel group Diagnostics Measurement - Voltage - resistor with 4-wire con nection - thermoresistor (RTD) with linearization, 4-wire connection - Thermocouple with linea rization and compensa tion at 0 C - Thermocouple with linea rization and compensa tion at 50 C - Thermocouple with linea rization and internal com pensation - Thermocouple with linea rization and external com pensation 1 Range of measurement 1 This type of measurement supports the following compensations: Use of a compensation box The compensation box must be compatible with the type of thermocouple connected. All thermocouples must be of the same type. Use of a thermal resistor for compensation (e.g. Pt100) The absolute terminal temperature is determined for compensation with a Pt100 resistor in the climatic range. In this case, the thermocouples to be compensated can be of different types. 122 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Table 3-22 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA parameter Range of values Default setting Type of parameter Effective range Basic settings Enable Diagnostic interrupt yes/no no dynamic module Process interrupt triggered by violation of limits yes/no no End-of-cycle process interrupt yes/no no Upper limit from 32511 to -32512 32767 dynamic Channel Lower limit from -32512 to 32511 -32768 Group diagnostics yes/no no static Channel group with wire break monitoring yes/no no Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50Hz dynamic Channel group Measurement mode 4DMU Current (4wire transducer) 4-wire transducer dynamic Channel group 4...20 mA dynamic Channel group Limit Diagnostics Measurement 2DMU Current (2wire transducer) Range of measurement 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA Parameters of the analog output module The following table provides an overview of the parameters of the analog output module that are static or dynamic and can be set for the modules as a whole or for a channel. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 123 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Table 3-23 Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA Parameter Range of values Default setting Type of parameter Effective range Basic settings yes/no no dynamic Module yes/no no static Channel retain last value yes/no no dynamic Channel Value -32512...32511 -6912 (0 mA) deactivated Current dynamic Channel 4...20mA dynamic Channel Enable diagnostic interrupt Diagnostics Group diagnostics and wire break monitoring Substitute value Output Output mode Current Output range 3.10.4 4...20 mA 0...20 mA Diagnostics of the Analog Modules Definition With the aid of the diagnostics function you can determine whether analog processing is faulty or free of faults and which faults have occurred. On detecting a fault, the analog modules output the signal value "7FFFH" irrespective of the parameterization. Parameterizing diagnostics You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7. Diagnostic evaluation With regard to diagnostic evaluation, differentiation is made between configurable and nonconfigurable diagnostic messages. In the case of configurable diagnostic messages, evaluation only takes place when diagnostics has been enabled by means of parameterization ("diagnostic enable" parameter). The non-parameterizable diagnostic messages are always evaluated irrespective of the diagnostic enable. Diagnostic messages trigger following actions: SF LED on analog module lights, if applicable channel fault LED, 124 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Transfer of diagnostic message to CPU, Diagnostic interrupt triggered (only if diagnostic interrupt has been enabled in the parameterization). Diagnostics of the analog input modules The table below provides an overview of the parameterizable diagnostic messages of the analog input modules. The enable is set in the "diagnostics" parameter block. The diagnostic information refers to either the individual channels or the entire module. Table 3-24 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x 0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnostics Configurable Wire break 1 Yes Undershoot of the measuring range Overshoot of the measuring range Channel Yes, (group error) Reference channel fault 2 Incorrect parameters in module No Incorrect parameters in module Module not configured external auxiliary voltage missing 3 internal auxiliary voltage missing 3 Fuse blown 3 Time watchdog tripped EPROM error Module No 4 RAM error 4 CPU error 4 ADU error 4 Hardware interrupt lost If wire-break monitoring is enabled and a wire break is detected at the 2-wire transducer (4 to 20mA), the AI 4 x 0 / 4 to 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART modules output a wire-break message when the input current drops below I 3.6 mA (wire-break limit to NAMUR). The wire break message is only deactivated (hysteresis), when the input current rises above 3.8 mA again. 1 In the case of the module AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD the line is checked by connecting a test current if wire break diagnostics is enabled. 2 Only for thermocouples with external compensation and compensation fault. 3 Only for AI 4 x 0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART with 24 volt supply from L+. 4 The tests are conducted during start-up and on-line. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 125 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Causes of error and remedies However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output the relevant programmable diagnostic messages. Table 3-25 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x 0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART - their possible causes of fault and remedies Diagnostic message Wire break Possible fault causes Corrective measures Break in the line between the mod Connect line ule and sensor Channel not connected (open) Deactivate channel group ("Measurement mode" pa rameter) Undershoot of the measuring range Input value below underflow range, error possibly caused by: on AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD incorrect type of thermocouple Check type of thermocouple Reversal of polarity at the sensor connection. Incorrect measuring range setting Check connection terminals Configure a different measuring range on AI 4 x 0/4...20mA Module does not report measuring range undershoot Sensor connected with reverse polarity; (a digitized value is output for 0 mA) 126 Overshoot of the measuring range Input value exceeds overflow range Configure a different measur ing range Reference channel fault A different sensor type is set as reference channel in the measur ing channels parameters Parameterize different type of sensor Reference channel error (wire break, for example. All measuring channels values are 7FFFH Eliminate fault in reference channel Incorrect parameters in module Module supplied with invalid pa rameters Check parameterization of module and re-load valid pa rameters Module not configured Module not supplied with parame Include module in parameter ters ization external auxiliary voltage missing No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply No internal auxiliary voltage No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply module-internal fuse defective Replace module Fuse blown module-internal fuse defective Replace module Time watchdog tripped partially high electromagnetic in terference Eliminate interference sour ces Module defective Replace module S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Diagnostic message Possible fault causes EPROM error RAM error CPU error ADU error Hardware interrupt lost Corrective measures partially high electromagnetic in terference Eliminate interference sour ces and switch CPU supply voltage OFF/ON Module defective Replace module The CPU is unable to process suc Change interrupt processing cessive hardware interrupts (viola in CPU and reparameterize tion of limits, end-of-cycle inter module if necessary rupts) at this rate Diagnostics of the analog output module Table 3-26 Diagnostic message of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA Diagnostic message Wire break Effective range of diagnostics Channel group 2 configurable Yes incorrect parameters in module No incorrect parameters in module Module not configured No internal auxiliary voltage external auxiliary voltage missing Module Fuse blown No Time watchdog tripped EPROM error 1 RAM error 1 CPU error 1 1 The tests are conducted during start-up and on-line. 2 Wire break recognition at output values I > 100 A and output voltage > 12V Causes of error and remedies However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output the relevant programmable diagnostic messages. Table 3-27 Diagnostic messages of analog output module SM 332; AO 4x0/4...20mA and their possible causes and remedies Diagnostic message Wire break incorrect parameters in module S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Possible fault causes Break in line between module and actuator Corrective measures Connect line Voltage at load resistor > 12V Lower load resistance to 500 Channel not connected (open) Deactivate channel ("Measure ment mode" parameter) Module supplied with invalid pa rameters Check parameterization of mod ule and re-load valid parameters 127 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Diagnostic message Module not configured Possible fault causes Corrective measures Module not supplied with param Include module in parameteriza eters tion external auxiliary voltage missing No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply No internal auxiliary voltage No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply module-internal fuse defective Replace module Fuse blown module-internal fuse defective Replace module Time watchdog tripped partially high electromagnetic in Eliminate interference sources terference Module defective EPROM error CPU error RAM error Replace module partially high electromagnetic in Eliminate interference sources terference and switch CPU supply voltage OFF/ON Module defective Replace module Reading out diagnostic messages You can read detailed diagnostic messages in STEP 7 by enabling the diagnostics functions at the analog modules. See also Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120) 3.10.5 Interrupts of analog modules Types of interrupts In principle, a differentiation is made between the following interrupts: Diagnostic interrupt Process interrupt Parameterizing interrupts You program the interrupts in STEP 7. Default setting The interrupts are inhibited by way of default. 128 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Diagnostic interrupt The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such as a wire break or short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt module (OB82). Process interrupt The working range is defined by programming a high and low limit. The module triggers a process interrupt if the process signal, such as the temperature of an analog signal module, is out of this working range, provided limit value interrupts are enabled. The interrupt-triggering channel can be identified based on the local data of OB 40 in the user program. Active process interrupts trigger process interrupt execution (OB 40) at the CPU, i.e. the CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class. If there are no higher priority classes pending processing, the stored interrupts (of all modules) are processed one after the other corresponding to the order in which they occurred. Process interrupt lost Channel events such as overshoot/undershoot of limits are saved to memory and trigger a process interrupt. The event is lost if a further event is generated at this channel before the CPU has acknowledged the process interrupt, i.e. before OB 40 was executed. This status triggers a "process interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt. The relevant diagnostics interrupt must be enabled. Further events at this channel are not logged until interrupt processing is completed for this channel. Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40 The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in word 8 of local data. Byte Variable Data type 6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#0 Address of the interrupt-triggering module As of 8 OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD see the follow ing figure Indication of the interrupt-triggering inputs S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Description 129 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules /% /% /% /% %LWQR /' 5HVHUYHG 9LRODWLRQRIORZOLPLWRIFKDQQHO 9LRODWLRQRIORZOLPLWRIFKDQQHO 9LRODWLRQRIKLJKOLPLWRIFKDQQHO 9LRODWLRQRIKLJKOLPLWRIFKDQQHO Image 3-16 Start Information of OB40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware interrupt A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels in succession. When all measured values are successfully converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement data at its channels to the CPU by means of an interrupt. With an end-of-cycle interrupt, bits 20 ... 23 and 28 ... 31 are set to 1. You can always use this interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values. 3.10.6 Characteristics of Analog Modules Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage of the analog module and on the operating status of the CPU. Table 3-28 Dependencies of analog input/output values on the CPU operating status and the supply voltage L+ CPU operating status POW ER ON RUN Supply voltage L+ at analog module L+ applied Parameters of analog input modules Process value Output value of the analog output module CPU value 7FFFH up to first conversion af Up to first conversion ... ter switching on or after module after switch-on has been parameterization has been completed if signal of 0 mA completed is output. after parameterization has been completed, previous value is output. No L+ 130 Overflow value 1 0 mA S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules CPU operating status POW ER ON STOP POW ER OFF 1 Supply voltage L+ at analog module L+ applied Parameters of analog input modules Process value Output value of the analog output module Default/last value 7FFFH up to first conversion af at 0...20 mA: 0 mA default at ter switching on or after module 4...20 mA: 4 mA default parameterization has been completed No L+ Overflow value 1 0 mA L+ applied - 0 mA No L+ - 0 mA only applies to SM 331; AI 8xT C/4 x RTD as no L+ supply voltage is required. Failure of the L+ supply voltage for the analog modules is always indicated by the group fault LED on the module and additionally entered in diagnostics. Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt is dependent on the parameterization. Table 3-29 Characteristics of analog modules dependent on the position of analog input value in value range The process value lies within the Input value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Channel fault LED Rated range Process value - - - - Overrange/ underrange Process value - - - - 7FFFH lit Entry made Diagnostic interrupt 1 lit Overflow Underflow 8000H lit Wire break 7FFFH lit 1 Process value - outside parameterized limit 1 lit lit 1 - 1 depending on parameterization 2 An active diagnostics error prevents the limit value process interrupt. Process in terrupt1, 2 - Example: An enabled wire break diagnostics renders limits below the wire break threshold ineffective. Impact of the range of values on the output The characteristics of the output modules depend on what part of the value range the output values are in. Table 3-30 Characteristics of analog modules dependent on position of analog output value in value range Output value in Output value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Channel fault LED Rated range CPU value - - - - Overrange/ underrange CPU value - - - - 0 mA - - - - Overflow S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 131 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Output value in Wire break 1 Output value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Channel fault LED CPU value lit 1 Entry Entry lit 1 made 1 made 1 depending on parameterization Influence of errors Faults occurring in analog modules with diagnostic capabilities and corresponding parameterization result in diagnostic entry and diagnostic interrupt. Refer to the respective chapter for a list of faults. The SF LED and, if applicable, the channel fault LED light on the analog module. Faults which cannot be parameterized in diagnostics (e.g. fuse blown) result in an entry being made in the diagnostic range and the fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status. See also Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 124) Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120) 3.10.7 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex analog modules Structure and contents of the diagnostic data records The diagnostics data for a module is stored in data records 0 and 1: Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of the module. Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data also stored in data record 0, plus additional module-specific diagnostics data that describe the status of a channel of the module. 132 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Byte 0 to byte 3 (data records 0 and 1) %\WH 0RGXOHHUURU ,QWHUQDOHUURU ([WHUQDOHUURU &KDQQHOHUURU H[WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ RQO\IRU(65'$% 0RGXOHQRWSDUDPHWHUL]HG ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHULQWKHPRGXOH %\WH 0RGXOHFODVVDQDORJPRGXOH &KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH %\WH 2SHUDWLQJPRGH 581 6723 &\FOHPRQLWRULQJWULSSHG ,QWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJHRIWKHPRGXOHIDLOHG %\WH 3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH (3520HUURU 5$0HUURU $'&'$&HUURU )XVHEORZQ 3URFHVVLQWHUUXSWORVW QRWIRU(65'$% S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 133 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules Byte 4 to byte 6 infoblock (data record 1) Bytes 4 to 6 form the infoblock with the information about channel type, length of diagnostics information and the length of the channels. %\WH &KDQQHOW\SH%$QDORJLQSXWPRGXOH &KDQQHOW\SH%$QDORJRXWSXWPRGXOH %\WH 1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFVELWV WKDWWKHPRGXOHRXWSXWVSHUFKDQQHO% 1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVRIWKHVDPHW\SHRIWKHPRGXOH %\WH % RQO\ZLWK (65'$%DQG(65'$% % RQO\IRU(66)$% &KDQQHOHUURUYHFWRU RQO\IRU(65'$%DQG(65'$% &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO %\WH &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO RQO\IRU(66)$% &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO &KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO 134 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) 7KHFKDQQHOHUURUYHFWRULVIROORZHGE\WKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD %\WHVWR FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURU QRWIRU(65'$% 3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQHUURU :LUHEUHDN FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURU RQO\IRU (65'$%DQG(66)$% %\WHVWR RU %\WHVWR 3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQHUURU :LUHEUHDN 5HIHUHQFHFKDQQHOIDXOW 8QGHUIORZ 2YHUIORZ 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Order Number 6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0 Features Properties of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD: 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured value resolution, can be adjusted separately at each channel group, depending on the settings of interference frequency suppression - 9 Bit + sign (integration time 2.5 ms) 400 Hz - 12 Bit + sign (integration time 162/3 / 20 ms) 60/50 Hz - 15 Bit + sign (integration time 100 ms) 10 Hz Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group: - Voltage - Resistance - Temperature user-specific measurement range per channel group configurable diagnostics configurable diagnostic interrupt 2 channels with limit monitoring S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 135 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) configurable limit interrupt electrically isolated from the CPU Common mode < 60 V between the channels Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Resolution The resolution of the measured value is directly proportional to the integration time selected, i.e. longer integration times at an analog input channel increase resolution accuracy of the measured value. Wiring diagram View and wiring diagram of analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Thermocouples, voltage measurement 60 $,[7&[57' 6) Optomultiplexer Electrical isolation + Input 0/0 ) - Input 0/0 9LQWHUQDO 0LQWHUQDO + Input 1/- Internal supply ) + Input 3/- Internal compensation ) - Input 3/- + Input 2/2 - Input 2/2 ) - Input 1/- 0 &+ 0 &+ 0 0 ,& &+ ,& 0 0 0 &+ 0 &+ 0 ,& 0 &+ ,& + Input 4/4 - Input 4/4 ) + Input 5/- - Input 5/- ) + Input 6/6 - Input 6/6 ) + Input 7/- ) Electrical isolation ; 6)$% 0 0 $'8 [ - Input 7/- Resistance measurement 6) Logic and backplane bus interface ) Current source 0 0 0 &+ 0 &+ 0 0 &+ ,& ,& 0 0 0 &+ 0 &+ 0 &+ ,& 0 ,& SF group fault display [red] channel-specific fault displays [red] ) >7&@) >57'@ Image 3-17 136 Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module. Notes on the module An external voltage supply L+ (24V) is not required for the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD. If thermal resistors (e.g. Pt100) are used for external compensation, connect them to channels 6 and 7. If a compensation box is used for external compensation, connect it to channel 7. Notes on the front connector You can use the front connector 6ES7392-1AJ20-0AA0 only for the analog input module 6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0. If you use a front connector, you attain a higher accuracy of temperature measurements with thermocouples in the measurement mode "Internal compensation". The accuracy of the internal reference junction temperature is 1.5 K when this front connector is used at ambient temperatures from 0 to 60 C. You can connect lines of 0.25 mm2 to 1 mm2. The use of this front connector results in no restrictions regarding the licenses of the module. Alternatively, you can use the front connector 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0, but without the increased accuracy. Parameterization The functions of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD are set with STEP 7 (refer to the STEP 7 online help), or in the user program with SFCs. Default settings The analog input module features default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts etc.. These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed in STEP 7. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 137 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Channel groups In the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 2 analog input channels are combined to form one channel group. Parameters can always only be assigned to one channel group, i.e. parameters which are specified for a channel group are always valid for both channels of this channel group. Table 3-31 Allocating analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD to channel groups Channel Allocated channel group Channel 0 Channel group 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel group 1 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel group 2 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel group 3 Channel 7 Special feature of resistant measurement Only one channel per channel group is required for the "resistance measurement". The "2nd" of the group is used for current sinking (IC). With access to the "1st" to read the measured value. The "2nd" channel of the group is preset with the overflow value "7FFFH". During diagnostics, the 1st channel provides the actual status (in compliance with parameterization) and the 2nd channel "free of faults". Non-connected input channels You must short-circuit activated and non-connected channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD. This way you ensure optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Deactivate all non-connected channels in STEP 7 in order to reduce module cycle times. Configurable measuring modes You can set the following measuring modes on the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/ 4 x RTD, make the setting in STEP 7. Voltage measurement Resistance measurement Temperature measurement 138 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Supported ranges of measurement The measuring ranges for which you can use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/ 4 x RTD can be found in the following tables. Define the relevant ranges of measurement in STEP 7. Wire-break monitoring The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD carries out wire-break monitoring for all ranges if it is enabled via parameterization. The four wires used in resistance thermometer mode (RTD) are monitored for wire break. Voltage measurement ranges measurement mode selected Voltage Explanation The digitalized analog values can be found in chapter Analog Representation for Voltage Measuring Ranges of Analog Inputs (Page 89). Measuring range 25 mV 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V Resistance measurement ranges measurement mode selected Explanation Measuring range Resistor 4-wire connection The digitized analog values are listed in the chapter 150 ohms Analog value representation of the measurement rang 300 ohms es of resistance sensors (Page 90). 600 ohms Connectable types of thermocouple The linearization of characteristic curves is specified for thermocouples in accordance with DIN IEC 584. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 139 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) For thermal resistor measurements, linearization of the characteristic curves is based on DIN 43760 and IEC 751. Table 3-32 Connectable thermocouples and thermal resistors Measurement type Explanation Measuring range Linearization and compensation at The digitized analog values for the thermocouples listed are found in 0 C the chapter Analog value repre Linearization and compensation at sentation (Page 87). 50 C (one unit corresponds to 0.1 C) Linearization and compensation internal comparison 1 Type T [Cu-CuNi] Linearization and compensation external comparison 2 Type N [NiCr-SiNiSi] Type U [Cu-CuNi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type L [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type R [Pt13Rh-Pt] Type S [Pt10Rh-Pt] Type B [Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh] Thermal resistance+ The digitized analog values for the Linearization, 4-wire connection (tem thermal resistors listed are found in the chapter Analog value repre perature measurement) sentation (Page 87). Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100 standard range Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100 cli matic range In the case of internal compensation in the module, all 8 channels are available for temperature measurements also with different times of thermocouples. 1 The module returns the terminal temperature when the input is short-circuited. This does not apply to thermocouple type B, which is not suitable for measurements in the ambient temperature range. 2 This type of measurement supports the following compensations: Use of a compensation box The compensation box must be compatible with the type of thermocouple connected. Terminated at channel 7. Use of thermal resistors in climatic range (e.g. Pt100) for compensation. The absolute terminal temperature is determined in the climatic range with a thermal resistor (e.g. Pt 100) for compensation purposes. In this case, the thermocouples to be compensated can be of different types. Terminated at channels 6 and 7. technical specifications Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 210 g Module-specific data 140 Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the value that applied be fore the parameters were set. Number of inputs 8 with resistance sensor 4 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Line length, shielded max. 200 m max. 50 m for voltage ranges 80 mV and thermocou ples ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 01ATEX1061 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 V DC Electrical isolation between the channels and backplane bus yes between the channels no Permitted potential difference of signals of the Ex area between the channels and backplane bus (UISO) 60 V DC 30 V AC between the channels (UCM) 60 V DC 30 V AC Insulation tested Channels with respect to backplane bus with 2500 V DC Current input from backplane bus max. 120 mA Module power loss typical 0.6 W Permitted potential difference of signals of the non-Ex area between the channels and backplane bus (UISO) 300 V DC 250 V AC between the channels (UCM) 75 V DC 60 V AC Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1061 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values per channel for thermocouples and thermal resistors U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 5.9 V I0 (short-circuit current) max. 28.8 mA P0 (load power) max. 41.4 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 40 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 43 F Um (error voltage) max. 60 VDC Ta (permissible ambient temperature) 30 V AC S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 max. 60C 141 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Connection of active encoders with the following limit values Ui = 1.2V Ii = 20 mA deviating from the above-specified values L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 15 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 14.6 F Analog value formation Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Configurable yes yes yes yes Integration time in ms 2.5 16 /3 20 100 Basic conversion time = 7.5 50 60 300 3 x integration time + + + + + Transient recover time optomultiplexer in ms 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 additional conversion time for wire break recognition in ms 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Resolution in bit (incl. overrange) 9+sign 12+sig n 12+sign 15+sign Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 400 60 50 10 2 Interference suppression, error limits Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) Common-mode rejection (UISO < 60 V) > 130 dB Normal-mode rejection (interference peak value < rated value of input range) > 40 dB Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (UISO < 60 V) > 70 dB Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to input range) 25 mV 0.09 % 50 mV 0.06 % 80 mV 0.05% 250 mV/500 mV/1V 0.04% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range) 25 mV 0.018% 50 mV 0.014% 80 mV 0.011% 250 mV/500 mV/1V 0.008% Temperature error (referred to input range) 142 25 mV 0.0019 %/K 50 mV 0.0013 %/K 80 mV 0.0011 %/K 250 mV/500 mV/1V 0.0010 %/K Linearity error (referred to input range) 0.003% S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 C, referred to input range) 0.003% The accuracy of temperature measurement with external compensation with thermal resistors is derived from: Error for the analog input of the type of thermocouple used Accuracy 1 of the type of thermal resistor used for compensation Error 1 of the compensation input The accuracy of temperature measurement with external compensation with compensation box is derived from: Error for the analog input of the type of thermocouple used Accuracy 1 of the compensation box Error 1 of the compensation input The accuracy of temperature measurement with compensa Error for the analog input of the type tion of the external reference junction maintained at 0 C / of thermocouple used 50 C is derived from: Accuracy 1 of the reference junction temperature The accuracy of temperature measurement with internal compensation (terminal temperature) results from: Error for the analog input of the type of thermocouple used Accuracy 1 of the internal reference junction temperature 2.5 K (in the range 0 to 60 C Due to the constant increase in the thermocouple characteristic at higher temperatures, the error in the compensation element is less effective than at temperatures in the vicinity of the compensation temperature. Exception: Thermocouple types J and E (relative linear progression) 1 Due to the little increase in the range from approx. 0 C to 40 C, the lack of compensation of the reference junction temperature has only a negligible effect in the case of thermocouple type B. Deviation of measuring temperatures when using thermocouples type B without compensation and measurement type "0 C compensation" setting: 700C and 1820C < 0.5C 500 C and 700 C < 0.7C. "Internal compensation" should be set if the reference junction temperature closely corresponds to the module temperature. This reduces the error for the temperature range from 500 C to 1820 C to < 0.5 C. Error limits of analog inputs for thermocouples (at 25 C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time) Type Temperature range Basic error 1 Temperature error 2 [C/K] T -150 C...+400 C 0.2K 0.006 -230 C ... -150C 1K -50 C...+400 C 0.2K 200 C....-50 C 1K -100 C....+1000 C 0.2K -200 C....-100 C 1K -150 C....+1200 C 0.2K -210 C ... -150 C 0.5K -50 C...+1200 C 0.2K -200 C....-50 C 1K U E J L S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 0.006 0.0075 0.02 0.02 143 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) Error limits of analog inputs for thermocouples K N R S B -100 C....+1372 C 0.2K 220 C....-100 C 1K -50 C...+1300 C 0.2K 150 C....-50 C 1K +200 C....+1769 C 0.3K -50 C...+200 C 1K +100 C....+1769 C 0.3K -50 C...+100 C 1K +700 C....+1820 C 0.3K +500 C....+700 C 0.5K +200 C....+500 C 3K 0.018 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.04 Error limits of analog inputs for thermal resistors (at 25 C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time) Type Temperature range Basic error 1 Temperature error 2 [C/K] Pt100 climatic -200 C....+325 C 0.05K 0.006 Pt200 climatic -200 C....+325 C 0.05K 0.006 Ni 100 climatic -60 C....+250 C 0.05K 0.003 Pt100 standard -200 C....+850 C 0.2K 0.01 Pt200 standard -200 C....+850 C 0.2K 0.01 Ni 100 standard -60 C....+250 C 0.1K 0.003 Error limits of analog inputs for resistance sensors (at 25 C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time) Type Resistance sensor Basic error 3 Temperature error 2 [C/K] 150 0.000 .176.383 0.006% 0.001 300 0.000 .352.767 0.006% 0.001 600 0.000 .705.534 0.006% 0.001 The basic error includes the linearization error of the voltage temperature conversion and the basic error of the analog/digital conversion at Tu = 25C. 1 The total temperature error = temperature error x max. ambient temperature change DTu as a tem perature difference with respect to 25C . 2 3 The basic error includes ADC error as a % value of the measuring range at Ta = 25 C. The operating error for the use of thermocouples / thermal resistors consists of: Basic error of the analog input at Tu = 25C Total temperature error Errors which occur due to the compensation of the reference junction temperature Errors of the thermocouple / thermal resistor used 144 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0) The operating error for the use of thermal resistors consists of: Basic error of the analog input at Tu = 25C Total temperature error Error for the sensor used Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 2 Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group fault indication red LED (SF) Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readout possible Data for sensor selection Input ranges (rated values) / input resistance 25 mV /10 M Voltage 50 mV /10 M 80 mV /10 M 250 mV /10 M 500 mV /10 M 1V /10 M 150 /10 M 300 /10 M 600 /10 M Type: /10 M Resistance Thermocouples T, U, E, J, L, K, N, R, S, B Resistance thermometer Pt100, Pt200, Ni100 Measuring current for thermoresistors and wire-break checks c. 0.5 mA /10 M Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Max. 35 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:10) Connection of signal transducers for voltage measurement possible for resistance measurement with 4-wire connection, with 3-wire connection1 with 2-wire connection1 possible Characteristic linearization Configurable for thermocouples Type : T, U, E, J, L, K, N, R, S, B for thermal resistors Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100 (standard and climatic range) Temperature compensation Configurable Internal temperature compensation possible S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 145 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Interrupts, diagnostics external temperature compensation with compensation box possible external temperature compensation with thermal resistors (e.g. Pt100) possible Compensation for 0 C reference junction temperature possible Compensation for 50 C reference junction temperature possible 1 without line resistance correction Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR) ...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916). See also Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120) 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Order Number 6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0 Features Properties of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA: 4 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured value resolution, can be adjusted separately at each channel group, depending on the integration time set - 10 Bit (integration time 2.5 ms) - 13 Bit (integration time 162/3 / 20 ms) - 15 Bit (integration time 100 ms) 146 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group: - Current - Channel deactivated User-specific measurement range per channel - 0 ... 20 mA - 4 ... 20 mA configurable diagnostics and configurable diagnostic interrupt Channel 0 and 2 with limit value monitoring and configurable limit interrupt The channels are electrically isolated from each other, from the CPU, and from load voltage L+ The analog inputs are HART-compatible Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Resolution The resolution of the measured value is directly proportional to the integration time selected, i.e. longer integration times at an analog input channel increase resolution accuracy of the measured value. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 147 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU / 0 ) ,QSXWb / / / ,VRODWLRQDPSOLILHU / 0 ) 9LQWHUQDO 0LQWHUQDO ,QSXWb ; 5'$% /RJLFDQG EDFNSODQH EXV ,QWHUIDFH 6) &+ ) (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ 0 &+ 0 / / 0 ZLUH ,QSXWb 0 0 / / 0 ) 0 ZLUH ) &+ $'8 ZLUH [ 0 / ZLUH ,QSXWb ZLUH / ZLUH (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ ZLUH 6) ZLUH 60 $,[P$ 0 &+ 0 0 0 0 6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ Image 3-18 Module view and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module. Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. 148 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Additional measures The SM 331-7RD00 (6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0) module reaches lower safety-relevant technical data for the connection of active encoders (see the first amendment of the certificate) if the unused transducer outputs (terminals 3, 7, 12 and 16) are locked with plastic bolts. Use for example M3 x 8 plastic screws for this (see diagram below). 1 3 6 7 5 12 4 16 2 3 Load voltage supply Process connector with screw-type connection Ex (i) process cable Intrinsically safe area Line chamber Plastic screw M 3 x 8 Parameterization The functions of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA are set in STEP 7 in the user program with SFCs. Default settings The analog input module features default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts, etc. These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed in STEP 7. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 149 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Channel groups The channel group is allocated to each input channel for parameterization of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA. Advantage: You can specify separate parameters for each channel! The table shows the allocation of the channels to channel groups: Table 3-33 Allocation of analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA to channel groups channel Allocated channel group Channel 0 Channel group 0 Channel 1 Channel group 1 Channel 2 Channel group 2 Channel 3 Channel group 3 Configurable measuring modes You set up the measurement types in STEP 7. You can set up the following measurement types: Current measurement Channel deactivated Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers The table below shows the current measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers. Define the relevant ranges of measurement in STEP 7. Table 3-34 Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers measurement mode selected Explanation Measuring range 2-wire transducer from 4 to 20 mA 4-wire transducer The digitalized analog values can be found in chapter from 0 to 20 mA Analog Representation for Current Measurement Rang from 4 to 20 mA es (Page 89). Wire-break monitoring Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA. For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, the input current dropping below I x 3.6 mA is interpreted as a wire break and, if enabled, an appropriate diagnostic interrupt is triggered. Influencing by HART signals When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program integration times of 162/3, 20 or 100 ms in order to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal to minimum. 150 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 290 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before the parameters were set. Number of inputs 4 Line length, shielded max. 200 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 01ATEX1060 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 V DC Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC Reverse voltage protection yes Transducer power supply yes short circuit-proof Electrical isolation between the channels and backplane bus yes between the channels and load voltage L+ yes between the channels yes between the backplane bus and load voltage L yes + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area between the channels and backplane bus DC 60 V AC 30 V between the channels DC 60 V AC 30 V between the channels and load voltage L+ DC 60 V AC 30 V between the backplane bus and load voltage L DC 60 V AC 30 V + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 151 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels between the backplane bus and load voltage L DC 75 V AC 60 V + Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L with 2500 V DC + Channels to each other with 2500 V DC Backplane bus with respect to load voltage L+ with 500 V DC Current input from backplane bus max. 60 mA from load voltage L+ max. 250 mA Module power loss typical 3 W Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1060 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values per channel U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 25.2 V I0 (short-circuit current) max. 68.5 mA P0 (load power) max. 431 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 7.5 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 90 nF Um (fault voltage) max. DC 60V AC 30V Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60C Analog value formation Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) yes yes yes yes 2.5 162/3 20 100 Basic conversion time including integration time in ms (several channels enabled) 7.5 50 60 300 Basic conversion time including integration time in ms (one channel enabled) 2.5 162/3 20 100 Resolution in bit + sign (incl. overrange) 10+ sign 13+ sign 13+ sign 15+sign Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 400 60 50 10 configurable Integration time in ms Interference suppression, error limits Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) Common mode interference between channels and reference ground M of the CPU (VISO < 60 V) 152 > 130 dB S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0) Series mode interference (measured value + interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to 22 mA input range) > 60 dB Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (UISO < 60 V) > 130 dB Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to input range) from 0/4 to 20 mA 0.45% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input range) from 0/4 to 20 mA 0.1% Temperature error (referred to input range) 0.01%/K Linearity error (referred to input range) 0.01% Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 C, referred to input range) 0.05% Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range Error at integration time 0.25% 2.5 ms 0.05% 162/3 ms 0.04% 20 ms 0.02% 100 ms Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 2 Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group fault indication red LED (SF) Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readout possible Technical date of the transducer power supply No-load voltage < 25.2 V Output voltage for transducer and cable at a transducer current of 22 mA (50 reference resistor on the module included) > 13 V Data for sensor selection Input ranges (rated values / input resistance) Current Permissible input current for current input (destruction limit) 0 to 20 mA /50 4 to 20 mA /50 40 mA Connection of signal transducers for current measurement as 2-wire transducer as 4-wire transducer S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 possible possible 153 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR) ...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916). See also Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 90) The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120) 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Order Number 6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0 Features The analog output module SM 332, AO 4 x 0/4 ... 20 mA is characterized by the following features: 4 current outputs in 4 groups Resolution 15 bit Configuration in Run (CiR) supported configurable diagnostics Channels electrically isolated Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+ Note When switching the load voltage (L+) on and off, incorrect intermediate values can occur at the output for approx. 10 ms. 154 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA 60 $2[P$ 6) (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ / 0 ) 2XWSXW / ' &+ $ 'LJLWDOWRDQDORJFRQYHUWHU / 0 ) 2XWSXW ' /RJLFDQG EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH [ 6) ) / 0 2XWSXW ' ) ) 2XWSXW / 0 ' &+ $ &+ $ &+ $ (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ ; 5'$% / / 0 4, 0 4, &+ 0 &+ 4, 0 &+ 4, 0 &+ 0 0 6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ Image 3-19 Module view and block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module. Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. Parameterization You set up the functionality designed for analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA in STEP 7 or in the user program with SFCs. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 155 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Default settings The analog output module features default settings for output type, interrupts, default settings etc.. These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed with STEP 7. Channel groups Table 3-35 Allocation of 4 channels to 4 channel groups of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA Channel Allocated channel group Channel 0 Channel group 0 Channel 1 Channel group 1 Channel 2 Channel group 2 Channel 3 Channel group 3 Unswitched output channels To ensure that the unswitched output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA are without voltage, you must deactivate them. You deactivate an output channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block. Analog outputs You can connect the outputs as: Current outputs The outputs can be set channel by channel. You program the output type in STEP 7. Output ranges Configure the various current output ranges in STEP 7. Table 3-36 Output ranges of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA selected output mode Current Explanation Output range The digitized analog values are listed in the chapter Analog value representation of the output range of the analog out puts (Page 102). from 0 to 20 mA from 4 to 20 mA Wire-break monitoring The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA carries out a wire break check. Conditions: A wire break can only be signaled if the minimum output current > 100 A and the voltage generated at the load > 12 V. 156 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Influence of load voltage dips on diagnostics messages If the 24 V load voltage falls below the permitted rated range (< 20.4 V), there may be a reduction in the output current at connected loads > 400 and output currents > 18 mA before a diagnostic message is transmitted. Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 280 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR They specify the output value that ap plied before the parameters were set. Number of outputs 4 Line length, shielded max. 200 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 01ATEX1062 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 V DC Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC Reverse voltage protection yes Electrical isolation between channels and backplane bus yes between channels and load voltage L+ yes between the channels yes between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area between channels and backplane bus DC 60 V AC 30 V between channels and load voltage L+ DC 60 V AC 30 V between the channels DC 60 V AC 30 V between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ DC 60 V AC 30 V Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area between channels and backplane bus S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 300 VDC 250 VAC 157 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) between channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC between the channels 300 VDC 250 VAC between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ DC 75 V AC 60 V Insulation tested between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 2500 V DC Channels to each other with 2500 V DC Backplane bus with respect to load voltage L+ with 500 V DC Current input from backplane bus max. 80 mA from load voltage L+ (at rated data) max. 200 mA Module power loss typical 4 W Analog value formation Resolution (incl. overrange) 15 Bit Cycle time (all channels) 9.5 ms Transient recovery time for resistive load 0.2 ms for capacitive load 0.5 ms for inductive load 0.2 ms Switch substitute values yes, configurable Interference suppression, error limits Crosstalk attenuation between outputs > 130 dB Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to out 0.55% put range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output range) 0.2% Temperature error (referred to output range) 0.01 %/K Linearity error (referred to output range) 0.02% Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 C, referred to output range) 0.005% Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (referred to output range) 0.02% Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group fault indication red LED (SF) Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readout possible monitoring for 158 Wire break yes as of output value and > 0.1 mA Output voltage > 12 V S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1062 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel) U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 14 V I0 (short-circuit current) max. 70 mA P0 (load power) max. 440 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 6.6 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 730 nF Um (fault voltage) max. 60 VDC 30 VAC Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60C Data for sensor selection Output ranges (rated values) Current from 0 to 20 mA from 4 to 20 mA Load impedance (in rated range of output) for current outputs - resistive load max. 500 - inductive load max. 6.6 mH1 - capacitive load max. 730 nF1 Current output No-load voltage max. 14 V Destruction limit for externally applied voltages / currents Voltages Current max. + 12 V / - 0.5V max. + 60 mA / - 1A Wiring of actuators for current output 2-wire connection 1 yes KEMA approval limitations When used in a non-Ex areas, the following resistive load max. 500 inductive load max. 15 mH capacitive load max. 3 F can be set as the load impedance. Configuration in RUN (CiR) If you use the Configuration in RUN function, the following special feature occurs. SF LED is lit: If a diagnostic event was pending before you started to reassign parameters, the SF LEDs (on the CPU, IM or module) may be lit even though the diagnostic event has been cleared and the module is operating properly. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 159 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0) Remedy: Only make new parameter settings when there is no diagnostic event pending on the module, or Inserting and removing modules Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR) ...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916). See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17) Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20) Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120) Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges (Page 89) 160 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4 Most of the examples listed in this manual refer to the use of HART analog modules with PROFIBUS DP interface modules. Overview There are two analog input modules and two analog output modules each with HART functions in the product range of the SIMATIC S7 Ex-HART analog modules. SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module), Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0 (Revision 5) Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0 (Revision 7) SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module), Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0 (Revision 5) Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0 (Revision 7) The electrical properties of Revision 5 and Revision 7 modules are identical. The modules differ only in the interfaces (parameters, diagnostics, user data and HART request interface) and in the HART functionality and the supported HART version. 4.1 Using HART analog modules Basic characteristics The SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules belong to the category of SIMATIC S7-Ex analog modules. Their basic properties were described in section "Simatic S7 Ex analog modules" and also apply here. You can operate the HART analog modules as part of the distributed I/O ET 200M with the interface modules: As of IM153-2BA00 or as of IM153-2BB00 as coupling to PROFIBUS DP. As of IM153-2BA20 as coupling to PROFIBUS DP for the modules 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0 and 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0. As of IM153-4BA00 as coupling to PROFINET IO. In this application, the ET 200M is the HART master for HART devices (intelligent field devices). The IM153 directs the commands (for example, parameter assignment) that come from the HART client (for example, SIMATIC PDM or programmed via the data record interface of the HART analog modules) through the HART analog module to the intelligent field devices. The reply comes back the same way. In the figure below, the gray line represents the communication path in an application with PROFIBUS DP. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 161 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.1 Using HART analog modules Image 4-1 Location of the HART analog modules in the distributed system Application in the system The HART analog modules are used in the distributed I/O connected to the PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. You can connect one field device to each of the two channels on a HART analog module: the module acts as a HART master, the field devices as HART slaves. Various software applications, such as SIMATIC PDM, can send or receive data to or from a transducer via a HART analog module. They can be compared to clients for which the HART analog module is the server. 162 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.2 Introduction to HART 4.2 Introduction to HART 4.2.1 Definition of HART Introduction This section provides you with an introduction to HART from a user's perspective: Definition of HART Advantages of HART analog modules Typical applications of HART Definition "HART" stands for "Highway Addressable Remote Transducer" The HART functions enable you to operate the analog modules in conjunction with digital communication. The HART protocol is generally accepted as a standard protocol for communication with smart field devices: Hart is a registered trademark of the "HART Communication Foundation" (HCF), which retains all rights for the HART protocol. You can find detailed information about HART in the HART specification. Advantages of HART The use of HART analog modules has the following advantages: Compatible connection to analog modules: current loop 4 - 20 mA additional digital communication with the HART protocol low power requirements with HART, important for use in hazardous areas a wide range of field devices with HART functions are now available integration of the HART functionality in the S7 system when using HART analog modules Typical applications The following are typical applications of HART: Installation of field devices (central assignment of parameters) Modification of field device parameters online Display of information, maintenance data and diagnostic data for field devices Integration of configuration tools for field devices via the HART interface S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 163 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.2 Introduction to HART 4.2.2 HART functions Introduction The HART protocol describes the physical characteristics of transmission: Data transfer procedures, message structure, data formats, and commands. HART signal The following diagram shows the analog signal with the modulating HART signal (FSK procedure). The HART signal is composed of sine waves at 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz and has a mean value of zero. It can be filtered out with an input filter, leaving the original analog signal unaffected. P$ P$ +] +] P$ 1 . . $ $ $ . $ . P$ 2 Time (seconds) (A) Response (K) Command Analog signal Image 4-2 164 The HART signal S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.2 Introduction to HART HART commands and parameters The adjustable properties of the HART field devices (HART parameters) can be set with HART commands and read using HART responses. The HART commands and their parameters are defined in three groups with the following properties: universal common-practice device-specific Universal commands and their parameters must be supported by all manufacturers of HART field devices; common-practice commands should also be supported. There are also devicespecific commands that apply to a particular field device. Examples of HART parameters The following table shows the HART parameters of the different groups: Table 4-1 Examples of HART parameters Parameter group HART field device parameters universal Measured or manipulated value (primary variable), manufacturer name, proc ess tags or final control element ID, additional measured values or manipu lated values common-practice Measuring range, filter time, interrupt parameters (message, alarm and warn ing limits), output range device-specific special diagnostic information Examples of HART commands The following two tables provide examples of commands: Table 4-2 Examples of universal commands Command Function 0 Read manufacturer and device type - only with this command 0 can field devices be addressed by means of a short frame address 11 Read manufacturer and device type 1 Read primary variable and unit 2 Read current and percentage of the range, digitally as floating-point number (IEEE 754) 3 Read up to four pre-defined dynamic variables (primary variables, secondary variables, etc.) 13, 18 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Read or write measuring point tag, description and date (data included in trans mission) 165 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.2 Introduction to HART Table 4-3 Examples of common-practice commands Command Function 36 Sets the upper limit of the range 37 Sets the lower limit of the range 41 Carries out the device self-test 43 Sets the primary variable to zero 109 Switch burst mode on or off Burst mode Burst mode means that a command initiates cyclic response of the slave. This response is sent repeatedly until the mode is deactivated by the master device. Data and status HART commands are often transmitted without data, because they are used to start a processing function. HART responses always contain data. The HART response frame always includes status data which you should evaluate in order to validate the response. 4.2.3 Application of HART System environment for HART use To use a smart field device with HART functionality, you require the following system environment (see diagram below): current loop 4 - 20 mA HART configuration tool: You can assign the HART parameters either with an external HART handheld device or with the configuration tool, SIMATIC PDM. The configuration tool accesses the HART analog module directly, whereas the HART hand-held device is connected parallel to the field device. SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is available as autonomous (standalone) tool or embedded in STEP 7 HW Config or PCS 7. 166 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.2 Introduction to HART HART system connection: The HART analog module assumes the function of a "master," in that it receives the commands from the HART configuration tool, forwards them to the field device, and then sends back the responses. The interface of the HART analog module comprises data records which are transmitted via the I/O bus. The data records must be created and interpreted by the HART configuration tool. Interface IM153-2 (PROFIBUS DP) and IM153-4 (PROFINET IO) for HART configuration tool: DP Connection which is capable of master class 1 as well as master class 2 functionality. )LHOGGHYLFHZLWK+$57IXQFWLRQDOLW\ +$57DQDORJPRGXOH &RQQHFWLRQWR 352),%86 P$ +$57UHVLVWDQFH 0RGHP +$57KDQGKHOG $'8 /9 )LOWHULQJRXWRIWKH +$57VLJQDO $QDORJGLJLWDOFRQYHUVLRQ RIWKHF\FOLFPHDVXUHG YDOXH 6,0$7,& 3'0 +$57SDUDPHWHU DVVLJQPHQWWRRO 0*URXQG Image 4-3 System environment required for HART Error handling The two HART status bytes transmitted with each response of the field device contain error information relating to HART communication, HART commands and device status, (see "HART communication data records"). These are evaluated by the HART analog module, among other devices, and made available in the system via the S7 diagnostic mechanisms. See also HART Communication Data Records (Page 194) S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 167 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation 4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation 4.3.1 Example configuration Application in the system A sample configuration is used to show you how to start up a HART analog module with the field devices connected, and the points you should take into consideration during operation. You can find more information on the operation of the field devices in the integrated help for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mage 4-4 168 5DQJHZKLFKLVQRW SRWHQWLDOO\H[SORVLYH DUHD Use of a HART analog module in a sample configuration S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation Note Notes on intrinsically-safe installation You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the IM 153 interface module and explosion-proof I/O modules, which include HART I/O modules, whose signal cables lead into the hazardous area. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the explosion-proof partition (6ES7 195-1KA00-0XA0) instead of the dummy module. 4.3.2 Setting Up the HART Analog Module and Field Devices Installation Commission the HART analog modules using STEP 7, and the intelligent field devices connected using the SIMATIC PDM programming tool: Configuring and assigning parameters 1. Plug the HART analog module into the ET200M distributed I/O system. "Configuring and assigning parameters" to the associated station in the SIMATIC Manager with STEP 7: Start by double-clicking on the "Hardware" icon. 2. Select the ET 200M distributed I/O with a High Feature IM153 from the module catalog and attach this to the PROFIBUS (note the DP slave address) or PROFINET IO network. 3. Insert the HART analog module in the desired slot and assign the module parameters: You start the parameter assignment dialog by double-clicking the HART analog module in the selected slot. With HART Revision 7 analog modules, you can also configure up to 8 additional HART variables in the user data area of the module using the parameter assignment dialog in HW Config. See 4.5.1 for more on this. 4. Insert the HART field devices in the corresponding channels. When you insert a HART field device, the field device already connected in the "Device Selection (Reassign)" configuration dialog is identified via the "Device identification". 5. Download the configuration for the station which also contains the parameters for the HART analog module, to the programmable logic controller. 6. The field devices are configured with SIMATIC PDM via the channel to which the field device is connected: You start by double-clicking the HART field device configured on the channel. 7. Now you can configure the field devices using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool: Within SIMATIC PDM, you see a device-specific configuration interface based on the type of the connected field device. You must have installed the EDD of the field device, the IM 153, and the HART analog module beforehand. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 169 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation Modifying the parameters of the field devices Note that the field devices report a configuration change to the HART module whenever you edit their parameters. This leads to a diagnostic interrupt on the programmable logic controller, provided this option is enabled. During commissioning it can be advantageous to disable the diagnostic interrupt when you assign parameters to the HART analog module. A diagnostic interrupt can also be triggered, if enabled, during parameter modification with the handheld. See also Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171) 4.3.3 Operating Phase of the HART Analog Module and Field Devices Operating phase In the operating phase you must distinguish between the cyclic return of user data, the acyclic HART operation and the cyclic HART communication. Cyclic process data such as the measured values can be requested from the automation system PROFIBUS DP master class 1) The user data area with input and output data is available for this. the acyclic operation for diagnostics and modifying the parameters of the field devices is carried out with the SIMATIC PDM parameter assignment tool or with a HART hand-held device using HART commands and HART responses. You can establish HART communication via read/write data record. The operating phase 1. Switch the programmable logic controller to "RUN": User data are transmitted cyclically via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. 2. You can evaluate the user data cyclically in your user program. With HART Revision 7 analog modules, up to four HART variables of the connected transducer are provided for evaluation in the user data. 3. You can perform diagnostics and re-configuration of field devices with the configuration tool, SIMATIC PDM: You start by double-clicking the HART field device configured on the channel. 4. You can send HART commands to the connected transducers at any time via the data record interface of the HART analog modules. For example, you can re-configure the transducers or read data from the transducers. See 4.4.6.3 for Revision 5 modules or 4.5.7.3 for Revision 7 modules. Access to the field devices The HART analog module generally accepts the modification of parameters for the field devices. Access rights can only be allocated using the configuration tool. 170 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Modifying the parameters of the field devices To modify the parameters of the field devices connected to the HART analog modules, proceed as follows: 1. To modify the parameters of a field device, enter a HART command using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool. 2. The HART analog module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects new field device parameters, provided diagnostics interrupts are enabled. Information on status After you have modified the parameters of a HART field device, the corresponding bit is set in the device status of the connected field device (= HART status byte). This should be regarded as an indicator and not as an error and is reset by the module. For more information, see the "HART status bytes" section. See also Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules (Page 174) 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Overview The following SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules are described in this section: SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module), Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module), Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0 This section provides the information you need to use the modules as a HART interface. 4.4.1 Parameters of HART Analog Modules Overview of the parameters The following table lists the parameters for the HART analog input module, the next table lists the parameters for the HART analog output module. The tables show which parameters can be set for the module as a whole and which parameters can be set separately for each channel. General information on assigning parameters can be found in the description of the SIMATICEx analog modules. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 171 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Table 4-4 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Parameter Value range Default setting Type of parame ter Effective range Dynamic Module Dynamic Channel Static Channel Dynamic Channel Basic settings enables Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Hardware interrupt triggered by limit violation Yes/no No End-of-cycle hardware interrupt Yes/no No High limit 20 ...0/4 mA (from 32511 to - 32512) Overflow (32767) Low limit 0/4 ...20 mA (from - 32512 to 32511) Underflow (-32767) Group diagnostics Yes/no No with wire break monitoring Yes/no No Deactivated HART Limit for hardware interrupt Diagnostics Measurement Measurement type 4DMU Current (4wire transducer) 2DMU Current (2wire transducer) HART (connected to 2DMU or 4DMU) Measuring range 0 to 20 mA (can on 4 to 20 mA ly be set with 4DMU), 4 to 20 mA Integration time / interference frequency suppression 2.5 ms; 16.6 ms; 20 ms; 100 ms 20 ms corresponds to in terference frequen cy suppression From 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 172 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 HART measurement The green HART status display indicates that HART measurement is enabled at a channel and that HART communication is active. When HART starts up, the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, followed by HART command 13. The resulting HART response data (for example "long frame" address and "tag"), are entered in the diagnostic data record 131 or 151. When it is operating, the HART analog module continually sends the HART command 1 to update the value of the primary variable. This value is entered in the user data area. Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Table 4-5 Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Parameter Value range Default setting Type of parame ter Effective range Basic settings enable Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module Yes/no No Static Channel Deactivated HART Dynamic Channel Diagnostics Group diagnostics Output Output mode Current HART Output range 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Reaction to CPU STOP Output with zero current and voltage (OCV) Set substitution value (SSV) Keep last value (KLV) Set substitution val ue (SSV) Substitute value 0 to 20mA 0 mA HART output mode If you have activated the HART output mode for a channel and HART communication is running, the green HART status display lights up. When HART starts up, the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, followed by HART command 13. The resulting HART response data (for example "long frame" address and "tag"), is entered in the diagnostic data record 131 or 151. When it is operating, the HART analog module continually sends the HART command 1 to update the value of the primary variable. This value is entered in the user data area. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 173 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 See also Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198) Input area (read) (Page 202) Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120) 4.4.2 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules Overview of diagnostic functions If errors occur during configuration or parameter assignment, or during the operating phase, you can use diagnostics to determine the cause of the error. The general diagnostic behavior of the HART analog module corresponds to that of the other SIMATIC S7-Ex analog modules. Diagnostic messages The diagnostic messages for the analog input modules are shown in the table "Diagnostic messages of the analog input module SM 331"; the diagnostic messages for the analog output modules are shown in the table "Diagnostic messages of the analog output module SM 332". The additional diagnostic messages are listed in the following table: Table 4-6 Additional diagnostic messages for the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART and the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Diagnostic message Effective range of diag nostics configurable with group diag nostics Modification of HART parameters reported by the connected field device Channel Yes HART group error Yes Causes of error The following table provides a list of possible causes and corresponding corrective measures for the individual diagnostic messages. Table 4-7 174 Additional diagnostic messages, possible causes of the errors, and remedies Diagnostic message Possible cause of error / diagnostics Corrective measures Modification of HART pa rameters reported by the connected field device The identifier for the modification of parameters to the HART field device was set in the HART device status. If you do not want diagnostic inter rupts to be triggered when parame ters are modified, you should disa ble the diagnostic interrupt. HART group error Communication and command error during HART operation affecting the connected HART field devices. For detailed information, evaluate the response data record of the rel evant client or the additional diag nostic data record. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 HART status bytes Each HART command is followed by a HART response containing data and status bytes. The status bytes provide information regarding Device status of the connected field device (e.g. modification of parameters) Communication error during transmission between HART analog module and the connected field device Command error during interpretation of the HART command by the connected field device (warning, rather than error) The HART status bytes are entered in the response data record unchanged. Their significance is described in the technical specifications for HART. You can read the device status in your user program by using SFC59 or SFB 53 to read the corresponding data records. See also Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 124) HART Communication Data Records (Page 194) Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198) 4.4.3 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules Overview of the interrupts The interrupt response of the HART analog module is similar to that of SIMATIC S7 Ex analog modules. You can set parameters to enable or disable any interrupt. Hardware interrupts with AI-HART In this context we distinguish between the "out-of-limits hardware interrupt" and the "end-ofcycle hardware interrupt". You can evaluate the local data in OB40 when a hardware interrupt is active. Table 4-8 Local data in OB40 Local data OB40 Bit 7 ...2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Limit Byte 0 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 High limit exceeded Byte 1 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 Low limit exceeded Byte 2 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant Byte 3 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant At the end of the cycle all the bits in bytes 0-3 of the additional information for OB 40 which are not reserved for channels 0 and 1 are set to "1". You can use the reserved bits to evaluate whether the upper or lower limit set has been exceeded for a particular channel: if a limit has been exceeded, a "1" is displayed instead of a "0". S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 175 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 See also Interrupts of analog modules (Page 128) Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171) 4.4.4 HART analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0) Order number 6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0 Features The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART is characterized by the following features: 2 inputs in 2 channel groups 2 encoder supply outputs for 2-wire transducers The resolution of the measured value can be set separately at each channel (see "Analog values and resolution") Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group: - 2-wire or 4-wire current transducers (with HART function) - 2-wire or 4-wire current transducers (no HART function) - Channel deactivated User-specific measuring range per channel - 0 ... 20 mA (no HART function) - 4 ... 20 mA Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt - Group diagnostics - Additional wire break monitoring - Diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt - Channels 0 and 1 with limit monitoring: Programmable generation of out-of-limits hardware interrupts - Programmable end-of-cycle hardware interrupt 176 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Electrical isolation - Channels electrically isolated - Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+ Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Analog values and resolution The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the input value for the HART analog input module is 15 bits + sign. Table 4-9 Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Selected measuring type Measuring range 2-wire transducer 4 to 20 mA 4-wire transducer 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Integration times when HART is used When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program integration times of 100 ms to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal to a minimum. Default settings HART measurement is set by default. There are other default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog module uses these settings when no parameter modification is carried out in STEP 7. Wire break check Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA. For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, undershooting the input current of I 3.6 mA is interpreted as a wire break. When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, the module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 177 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA 60 $,[P$+$57 ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU + ZLUH ZLUH &+ 0 ZLUH 0 ZLUH / ZLUH $'8 02 '(0 / 0 /RJLFDQG EDFN SODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH 0 ZLUH 0LQWHUQDO ; 7%$% 0 ZLUH + ,QSXWb / 9LQWHUQDO ) / / 02 '(0 [ / 0 ) ,QSXWb / ZLUH (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ ZLUH 6) 0 0 ZLUH &+ ZLUH ZLUH 6) ) (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ + 0 0 0 6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ + +$57VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@ Image 4-5 Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Note The 200 ohm resistor must be in the measuring circuit when using HART transducers. This means that a 2-wire HART transducer must be connected to terminals 3 and 5 (12 and 14) and a 4-wire HART transducer to terminals 5 and 6 (14 and 15). The 200 ohm resistor is optional in the measuring circuit for standard transducers without HART. Note Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation. 178 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Special feature for the connection of active encoders Lock the unused transducer outputs at terminals 3 and 12 with plastic bolts if you connect active encoders to the SM 331-7TB00 module (6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0). You can use M3 x 8 plastic screws, for example (see the diagram below). Note that these measures reduce safety-relevant data of the module. For information on safety data, refer to the first amendment of the certificate. 1 3 6 5 12 4 2 3 Load voltage supply Process connector with screw-type connection Ex (i) process cable Intrinsically safe area Line chamber Plastic screw M 3 x 8 Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. Technical specifications of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0) Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 260 g Module-specific data S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 179 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before the parameters were set. Number of inputs 2 Number of power outputs 2 Line length, shielded Max. 400 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 97ATEX3039 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 VDC Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Reverse voltage protection Yes 2-wire transducer power supply short circuit-proof Yes (approx. 30 mA) Electrical isolation Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels Yes Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes Between the backplane bus and load voltage L Yes + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L 60 VDC 30 VAC + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area Between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC Between channels 300 VDC 250 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L 75 VDC 60 VAC + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules 180 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L 75 VDC 60 VAC + Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L + With 2500 VDC Channels to each other With 2500 VDC Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC Current input From backplane bus Max. 100 mA From load voltage L + max. 180 mA Module power loss typical 4.5 W Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate 97ATEX3039 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http:// support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values per channel U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 26 V I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 96.1 mA P0 (power under load) Max. 511 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 3 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 62 nF Um (fault voltage) Max. DC 250V Ta (permissible ambient temperature) 0 to 60C Analog value formation Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Configurable Yes Yes Yes Yes Integration time in ms 2.5 16 2/3 20 100 Basic conversion time plus integration time in ms (one channel enabled) 2.5 16 2/3 20 100 Basic conversion time including integration time in ms (2 channels enabled) 7.5 50 60 300 Resolution in bits +sign (including the overshoot range) 10 +sign 13+ sign 13+ sign 15+sign 400 60 50 10 Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 181 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Interference suppression, error limits Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) Common mode interference between channels and reference ground M of the CPU (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB Series mode interference (measured value + interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to 22 mA input range) > 60 dB Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB Operational limit (in total temperature range, based on input range) from 0/4...20mA 0.45% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, based on input range) from 0/4...20mA 0.1% Temperature error (based on input range) 0.01%/K Linearity error (based on input range) 0.01% Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C, based on input range) 0.05% Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range Error at integration time 2.5 ms 0.25% 16 2/3 ms 0.05% 20 ms 0.04% 100 ms 0.02% Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 1 Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error display Red LED (SF) Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readable Possible HART communication active and OK Green LED (H) Technical date of the transducer power supply No-load voltage < 29.6 V Output voltage for transducers and cables at 22 mA transducer current (50 W measurement resistance on module included) > 15 V Data for sensor selection Input ranges (rated values / input resistance) Current 0 to 20 mA; /50 4 to 20 mA: /50 Permissible input current for current input (destruc 40 mA tion limit) 182 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Connection of signal transducers for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Possible as 4-wire transducer Possible See also Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 90) The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916) 4.4.5 HART analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0) Order number 6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0 Features The HART analog output module has the following features: 2 current outputs in 2 channel groups Resolution 12 bit (+ sign) Output type selectable per channel: - Current output with HART - Current without HART - Channel deactivated Selection of any output range per channel - 0 to 20 mA (no HART function) - 4 to 20 mA Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt - Group diagnostics - Diagnostic interrupt Electrical isolation - Channels electrically isolated - Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+ S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 183 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Read-back capability of the analog outputs Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Analog values and resolution The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the output value for the HART analog output module is, however, 12 bit. Table 4-10 Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA Selected output mode Current Output range 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Default settings The output type HART is the default setting. There are also default settings for substitute value, diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog output module uses these settings when no parameters have been changed in STEP 7. Wire break check Wire break monitoring is possible for the current range 0/4 to 20mA. Condition: Minimum output current > 500 A Effect of a falling load voltage on the diagnostic message When the 24 V load voltage falls under the permissible rated range (< 20.4 V), if loads > 650 are connected and there are output currents > 20 mA, the output current may be reduced before a diagnostic message is issued. Readback capability The analog outputs can be read back in the user data range (+ sign) with a resolution of 8 bit. Note that the value read back from the analog output is only available at the corresponding accuracy when the conversion cycle is completed. 184 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Wiring diagram of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 60 $2[P$+$57 6) / 0 ) 2XWSXW ' + / $ &+ PRGHP / / 4, 0 &+ +$57 ,VRODWLQJ DPSOLILHU [ /RJLFDQG EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH ) 2XWSXW + 6) 'LJLWDOWR DQDORJ FRQYHUWHU / 0 ' $ PRGHP ) &+ 4, 0 &+ +$57 + ; 7%$% (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ 0 0 0 6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@ + +$57VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@ Image 4-6 Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Note Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation. Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 185 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Non-wired output channels To ensure that non-wired output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART are deenergized, you have to deactivate them. You deactivate an output channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block. Technical specifications of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0) Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight Approx. 280 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR They output the output value that applied before the parameters were set. Number of outputs 2 Line length, shielded Max. 400 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 97ATEX2359 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 VDC Rated load voltage 24 VDC Reverse voltage protection Yes Electrical isolation Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels Yes Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ Yes Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area 186 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Between channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC Between channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC Between channels 300 VDC 250 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L With 2500 VDC + Channels to each other With 2500 VDC Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC Channels with respect to shield With 500 VDC Current input From backplane bus Max. 100 mA From load voltage L+ (at rated data) Max. 150 mA Module power loss Typical 3.5 W Analog value formation Output value Resolution (including overrange) 12 bit (+ sign) Cycle time (all channels) 5 ms Transient recovery time for resistive load 2.5 ms For inductive load 2.5 ms For capacitive load 4 ms Set substitute values Yes, configurable Readback value Resolution 8 bit (+ sign) Conversion time (per channel) 40 ms Interference suppression, error limits Crosstalk attenuation between the outputs >130 dB Operational limit (across temperature range, rela 0.55% tive to output range) Intrinsic error limit (operating error limit at 25C relative to the output range) S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 0.15% 187 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Temperature error (relative to the output range) 0.01%/K Linearity error (based on output range) 0.03% Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C, based on output range) 0.005% Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (based on output range) 0.02% Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error display Red LED (SF) Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readable Possible Monitoring for Wire break From output value Yes HART communication active and OK Green LED (H) > 0.5 mA Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 97ATEX2359 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values of the output circuits (per chan nel) U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 19 V I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 66 mA P0 (power under load) Max. 506 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 7.5 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 230 nF Um (fault voltage) Max. 60 VDC Ta (permissible ambient temperature) Max. 60C Data for actuator selection Output ranges (rated values) Current 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Load impedance (in rated range of output) for current outputs - Resistive load Max. 650 - Inductive load Max. 7.5 mH1 Capacitive load Max. 230 nF1 Current output No-load voltage Max. 19 V Destruction limit for externally applied voltages / currents 188 Voltages Max. + 17 V / - 0.5 V Current Max. + 60 mA / - 1A S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Wiring of actuators For current output 2-wire connection Yes KEMA approval limitations can be set as the load when used in non-ex areas 1 Inductive load max. 15 mH Capacitive load max. 3 F *) *) HART communication no longer possible, however See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs (Page 102) Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171) HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916) 4.4.6 Data record interface Introduction This section contains specific data you need for programming, diagnostics and HART communication if you want to extend the functionality of STEP7 standard applications or deploy your own software tool for HART communication. Configuration and parameter assignment with STEP 7 You can configure and assign parameters of the HART analog modules with STEP 7. The integrated help system supports you in this. You can integrate certain additional functions for writing parameters and reading diagnostic data in your user program by means of SFCs. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 189 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 4.4.6.1 Parameter Data Records Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog input The figures below show data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the dynamic parameters for AI-HART and AO-HART. %\WH %\WH 3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG *URXSGLDJQRVWLFV :LUHEUHDNPRQLWRULQJ &KDQQHO &KDQQHO %\WH 3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG (QDEOH (QGRIF\FOHSURFHVVLQWHUUXSW (QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW +DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWZKHQOLPLWH[FHHGHG %\WH ,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH &KDQQHO &KDQQHO PV PV PV PV 0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRU FKDQQHO 0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRU FKDQQHO %\WH %\WH %\WH VHHWKHIROORZLQJ 7DEOH 0XVWEH 0XVWEH %\WH %\WH WR %\WH +LJKOLPLWFKDQQHO /RZOLPLWFKDQQHO %\WH WR %\WH +LJKOLPLWFKDQQHO /RZOLPLWFKDQQHO ILUVWWKHKLJKE\WH WKHQWKHORZE\WH Image 4-7 Parameters of the HART analog input module Table 4-11 Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module Measurement type 190 Code Measuring range Code Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000 4-wire transducer 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 2#0010 2#0011 2-wire transducer 2#0011 4 to 20 mA 2#0011 HART (2-wire or 4-wire transduc ers can be connected) 2#0111 4 to 20 mA HART 2#1100 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog output The figure below shows data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the dynamic parameters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mage 4-8 Parameters of the HART analog output module Table 4-12 Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module Output mode Code Output range Code Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000 Current output without HART 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 2#0010 2#0011 Current output with HART 2#0111 4 to 20 mA HART 2#1100 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 191 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 4.4.6.2 Diagnostic data records Structure and contents of the diagnostic data The diagnostic data for a module can be up to 16 bytes long and consist of data records 0 and 1: Data record 0 contains system-specific diagnostic data: 4 bytes that are set on a systemwide basis and apply to both HART analog inputs and outputs. Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data of an S7-300 that are also in data record 0 and 6 bytes of module class-specific diagnostic data. Diagnostic data record DS0 / DS1 %\WH 0RGXOHHUURU ,QWHUQDOHUURU ([WHUQDOHUURU &KDQQHOHUURU ([WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ 1RSDUDPHWHUV VHWLPPHGLDWHO\DIWHUUHWXUQRIYROWDJH ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHUVLQWKHPRGXOH %\WH 0RGXOHFODVV&3 &KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH %\WH &\FOHWLPHPRQLWRULQJIRUWKHPRGXOHUHVSRQGHG ZDWFKGRJ 0RGXOHKDVQRLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH %\WH 3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH (3520HUURU 5$0HUURU $'&'$&IDXOW )XVHEORZQ +DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWORVW RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$,+$57 Image 4-9 192 Diagnostic data: data record 0/1 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Diagnostic data: data record DS1 The following diagram shows the contents of bytes 4 to 9 of the diagnostic data. %\WH &KDQQHOW\SH%+$57DQDORJLQSXWPRGXOH &KDQQHOW\SH%+$57DQDORJRXWSXWPRGXOH %\WH %\WH %\WH 1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFELWV RXWSXWE\WKHPRGXOHSHUFKDQQHO % 1XPEHURILGHQWLFDOFKDQQHOV SHUPRGXOH % &KDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWVH[LVWZKHQWKH IROORZLQJ,' ,GHQWLILHUIRUFKDQQHORUFKDQQHOJURXS ,GHQWLILHUIRUFKDQQHORUFKDQQHOJURXS %\WH &KDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWVIRUFKDQQHO &RQILJXULQJSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWHUURU +$57SDUDPHWHUUHDVVLJQPHQWUHSRUWHGE\ FRQQHFWHGILHOGGHYLFH :LUHEUHDN +$57FKDQQHOHUURUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQDERXW+$57UHVSRQVHGDWD UHFRUGRUDGGLWLRQDOGLDJQRVWLFV 9LRODWLRQRIPHDVXUHPHQWUDQJHORZHUOLPLW RQO\LQWKHFDVHRIDQDORJLQSXW 9LRODWLRQRIPHDVXUHPHQWUDQJHXSSHUOLPLW RQO\LQWKHFDVHRIDQDORJLQSXW %\WH Image 4-10 &KDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWVIRUFKDQQHO $VVLJQPHQWFRUUHVSRQGVWRFKDQQHO 6HH%\WH Diagnostic data: data record 1 Note Please note the following points regarding diagnostic data: If a HART channel error occurs, you can obtain further information by using SFC59 or SFB 53 to read the status in the HART response data record for the relevant client or the additional diagnostic data record for the relevant channel. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 193 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 See also HART Communication Data Records (Page 194) Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198) 4.4.6.3 HART Communication Data Records Transfer data records HART communication can be operated by up to 7 clients each using two separate channels. There are 14 separate data transfer areas for this purpose, 7 for channel 0 and 7 for channel 1. Each transfer area consists of a command data record and a response data record. Coordination rules for HART communication Each client / channel is allocated fixed data record numbers: Chan nel Client / data record 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Command 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 0 Response 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 1 Command 50 54 58 62 66 70 74 1 Response 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 Each client may only use the data record numbers allocated to its transfer area. For example, for client 6, channel 0: the command is data record 30 and the response is data record 32. After having written a command data record, the client must read the response data record before it writes the next command data record. The transfer area of each client is allocated a data ready bit in the user data area, which is set when new data can be collected. In Master Class 2 the client can evaluate the "processing state" in the response data record: if the "processing state" indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current response data or error bits respectively. All data must be read, because the module can modify the data record if the initial read operation returns a successful or faulty state. The status section of the response data record provides information on any errors that have occurred. The HART burst mode cannot be used by more than one client at any one time (that is, only one client can set this operating mode with a command). 194 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Structure of the command data record The following diagram shows the structure of the data record, which you can use to write a command in the transfer area of a client. The HART analog module transmits the command to the connected HART field device. %\WH DOZD\V PRQRGURSILHOGGHYLFHSHUFKDQQHO LQGLYLVLEOHFRPPDQGVHTXHQFH PRGXOHFRPPDQG +$57FRPPDQG %\WH &RPPDQGQXPEHU 1XPEHURIFRPPDQGE\WHV VHHWKH+$57 FRPPDQGV\QWD[ %\WH %\WH WR &RPPDQGGDWDDFFRUGLQJWR WKH+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ /HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHV PD[E\WHV %\WH Image 4-11 Command data record of the HART analog module Notes on the command The same client must not send a second command until the response to any previous command has been read. In order to prevent interim execution of the commands of other clients, the client must set the "indivisible command sequence" bit in its command: The inseparable command sequence is maintained as long as the bit "inseparable command sequence" is set. The inseparable command sequence is terminated if the bit "inseparable command sequence" is not set, or automatically after 10 seconds by the module. While an inseparable command sequence is set for one client, one command from each of the other clients can be stored temporarily in the buffer. The stored commands are processed once the inseparable command sequence has been terminated. Notes on response Always make sure that you are reading the current response data record. If the processing state in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current response data or error messages respectively. Alternatively you can evaluate the "data ready" in the user data area: the transfer area of each client is allocated a bit in the user data area which is set when new data arrives. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 195 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Structure of the response data record The following figure shows the structure of the response data record, which contains the response to the HART command you sent previously and any error or status bits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mage 4-12 Response data record of the HART analog modules Evaluating the response data When you have an up-to-date response data record, you can check the following: Look for the "last command" entry to verify that the response belongs to the command sent. You can evaluate the "Group error bits" (see following table) to locate individual errors. You can obtain more information from "HART protocol errors during response" (see following table) and both HART status bytes. In the group error bytes the corresponding bits will be set to "1". 196 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Table 4-13 Bit No. HART group error displays HART group error display Meaning 0 always 0 not used 1 command rejected Used in the following cases: For a module command which does not exist. If you try to activate the burst mode when it is already activated. If you try to deactivate the burst mode when it was activated by another client. If you try to change the polling address of the HART field device. 2 further status information available. Corresponds to bit 4 in the 2nd HART status byte. You can obtain further status information with the HART command 48. 3 HART device status--> "Modification The field device transmits its device state. This in of parameters" entry in diagnostic da formation is found in the 2nd HART status byte ta, data record 1 which is accepted unchanged. 4 HART command status The field device transmits displays on the receipt of the command. Information on this can be found in the 1st HART status byte. 5 Error during HART communication-> "HART group error" entry in diag nostic data, data record 1 The field device has detected a communication er ror while receiving the command. Information on the error can be found in the 1st HART status byte which is accepted unchanged. 6 HART protocol error during re sponse--> "HART group error" entry in diagnostic data, data record 1 Error during HART communication between field device and module, i.e. the response was incor rectly received. Information on the cause of the er ror can be found in the next byte. See following table. 7 Wire break--> parallel entry "Wire break" in diagnostic data, data record 1 The connection to the transducer or final control element is interrupted. Table 4-14 Bit No. HART protocol error during response from field device to module HART protocol error in byte 2 Meaning 0 bad frame timing Waiting time elapsed without response being re ceived from field device. 1 always 0 not used 2 bad character transmission timing The pause between two bytes was not observed. 3 checksum error in response The checksum calculated does not match the checksum transmitted. 4 Response frame error Error receiving HART signal (in UART) 5 Response overrun error Error receiving HART signal (in UART) 6 Response parity error Error receiving HART signal (in UART) 7 HART access not possible The connection to the field device is permanently used. This error is registered if the transmission time exceeds 10 seconds. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 197 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 4.4.6.4 Additional diagnostic data records Additional diagnostic data The additional diagnostic data provide information on the state of the HART communication following the last command. Additional diagnostic data record 128 for channel 0, 129 for channel 1 Additional diagnostic data record 130 for channels 0 and 1: When the module starts up the recognized connected HART field devices and their identifiers ("tags") are entered here. Additional diagnostic data records 131 for channel 0 and 151 for channel 1 with the data for the identifiers found in the additional diagnostic data record 130. Structure of the diagnostic data records 128 and 129 The following figure shows the structure of the diagnostic data records 128 and 129. %\WH DOZD\V PRQRGURSILHOGGHYLFHSHUFKDQQHO 1XPEHURIWKHODVWFOLHQWLI+$57FRPPDQGKDVHUURU PRGXOHFRPPDQG +$57FRPPDQG %\WH %\WH %\WH WR %\WH +$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\V +$57SURWRFROHUURUIRUUHVSRQVHIURPILHOGGHYLFHWRPRGXOH DOZD\VUHVHUYHGIRUWLPHVWDPS $VRIKHUH+$57VWDWXV %\WH /DVWFRPPDQG %\WH %\WH VW+$57VWDWXVE\WHDQG QG+$57VWDWXVE\WHVHHWHFKQLFDOVSHFLILFDWLRQIRU+$57 Image 4-13 198 Diagnostic data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Structure of the diagnostic data record 130 The diagram below shows the structure of diagnostics data record 130 from which you can request the identification of connected HART transducers or final control elements. %\WHV IRUFKDQQHO DQG %\WHV IRUFKDQQHO %\WHV IRUFKDQQHO DQG %\WHV IRUFKDQQHO Image 4-14 %LWVWR %LW1R +$57ILHOGGHYLFHIRXQG QR+$57ILHOGGHYLFH IRXQG %LWVWR %LW1R +$57LGHQWLILFDWLRQIRXQG QR+$57LGHQWLILFDWLRQ IRXQG Diagnostic data record 130 of the HART analog modules Structure of the diagnostic data records 131 and 151 These contain the data corresponding to the identifiers marked in data record 130: The address of the HART field device found and the HART identifier with measuring point tag or final control element identifier. The structure is illustrated in the following diagram. Data record 131 for channel 0 (length: 38 bytes) Data record 151 for channel 1 (length: 38 bytes) %\WH %\WH %\WH Image 4-15 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 1RRIE\WHVIRUWKHUHVSRQVHGDWDWR+$57 FRPPDQG +$57LGHQWLILFDWLRQ 5HVSRQVHGDWDWR+$57FRPPDQG ORQJIUDPHDGGUHVVE\WHVDQG 0HDVXULQJSRLQW,' WDJ 5HVSRQVHGDWDWR+$57FRPPDQG %\WH %\WH Diagnostic data records 131 and 151 of the HART analog module 199 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 4.4.6.5 Additional parameter data records Structure of the parameter data records 128 and 129 The following diagram shows the structure of the additional parameter data records 128 for channel 0 and 129 for channel 1. The settings affect the assigned channel: %\WH 1XPEHURIUHWULHVLQ+$57FRPPXQLFDWLRQ %\WH :LUHEUHDNILOWHUWLPH 8QLWV RQO\$,+$57 %\WH 5HIUHVKWLPHRIWKH+$57YDULDEOHVLQWKHXVHU GDWDDUHDVHHGLDJUDP 8QLWV Image 4-16 Parameter data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules Notes on the additional parameters The additional parameters comprise parameters which you do not normally need to change, as they have already been set to an optimized value: The following table provides explanations of the parameters and the default values. Table 4-15 Additional parameters of the HART analog modules Parameter Explanation Value range and default setting Repeated attempts The HART analog modules initiate the configured retry sequence when send ing a command to a field device whose port is in use by another function. Value range: 0 to 127 Default setting: 3 No repeat at 0 tempts: Wire break filter time 1 A wire break is only signaled if it occurs for longer than the set filter time. Value range: Default set ting: no filter time: 0 to 20 3 0.75 s 0 Update time The HART modules send the HART command 1 automatically, to read the present value of the primary variable. Value range: Default set ting: no filter time: 0 to 255, 12 3s 0 Several diagnostics interrupts may be generated during startup due to differences in the time-related startup characteristics of transducers. The wire break filter time was introduced to avoid this problem. 1 Default parameter assignment for DP master class 2 HART analog modules which are not in parameterized state, for example after power failure, can receive default parameters from PROFIBUS DP master class 2 when the PLC is in OFF state. This is carried out with the aid of parameter data record No. 250 which consists of one byte with the value unequal 0. However, the assignment of default parameters can only be initiated when the module is in an unparameterized state. You can determine the state of the module by reading the diagnostic data record. 200 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 4.4.6.6 User data interface Overview of the user data The user data range of the HART analog modules includes the following for both channel 0 and channel 1: Current as analog input value or analog output value Primary variable in HART format (measured value or manipulated variable) Identifiers for clients to indicate that new data can be collected. Relative addresses are specified in the description of the user data. Determine the module address offset using the "Configuring and programming" application in STEP7. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 201 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5 Input area (read) Structure of the user data The following figure shows the structure of the user data area for the HART analog input module. The data for the user data area can be read in the desired format using "Read peripheral data" (for example, L PIW 256) and evaluated in your user program. &KDQQHO $QDORJLQSXWYDOXH ZLWK$,+$57 5HDGEDFNYDOXH ZLWK$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW &KDQQHO $QDORJLQSXWYDOXH ZLWK$,+$57 5HDGEDFNYDOXH ZLWK$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW %\WH 0DLQSURFHVVTXDQWLW\ SULPDU\YDULDEOH 3URFHVVYDOXHDVIORDWLQJSRLQWDVVSHFLILHGLQ +$57IRUFKDQQHO %\WH %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ,(((IORDWLQJSRLQWIRUPDW +$57FRGHIRUWKHSK\VLFDOVL]HRIWKH+$57 YDULDEOHVIRUFKDQQHO %\WH %\WH %LWQR&OLHQWQR %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH Image 4-17 202 'DWDUHDG\ELW LQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHUHDUH QHZXQUHDGUHVSRQVHGDWDLQWKHWUDQVIHU DUHDRIWKHFOLHQW 'DWDIRUFKDQQHOVWUXFWXUHDQDORJRXVWR FKDQQHOE\WHV Input user data area of the HART analog modules S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Output Area (write) Structure of the user data The following diagram shows the structure of the user data area for the HART analog output modules. The data for the user data area can be read in the desired format using "Write peripheral data" (for example, L POW 256) and evaluated in your user program. &KDQQHO $QDORJRXWSXWYDOXH RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW &KDQQHO $QDORJRXWSXWYDOXH RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW %\WH %\WH Image 4-18 4.5 5HVHUYHG User data area of the HART analog output module HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Overview The following SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules are described in this section: SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module), Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module), Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0 This section provides the information you need to use the modules as a HART interface. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 203 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 The HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 offer the following in comparison to Revision 5 modules: You can use HART 5, HART 6 and HART 7 transducers. You can also configure up to 8 additional HART variables in the user data area of the module using the parameter assignment dialog in HW Config. The mapping of HART commands and HART responses to S7 data records is based on the PROFIBUS Profile HART Version 1.0. See 4.5.7.3. Requirement The HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 can be used as of STEP7 V5.5 + SP4 and SIMATIC PCS 7 V8.1. The modules can be used on PROIFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO in connection with the respective High Feature interface modules IM 153-2, 6ES7153-2BA02-0XB0 or IM 153-4, 6ES7153-4BA00-0XB0. Integration of the HART analog modules based on the PROFINET IO standard is possible with the current GSDML file (as of GSDML V2.3 Siemens ET200M 20140124.xml) for IM153-4. Field devices can be configured with SIMATIC PDM V6.1 and higher or SIMATIC PDM V 8.1 SP 1. You need the EDD for the ET 200M for this. For PROFIBUS DP as of EDD V1.1.17 and PROFINET IO as of EDD V770.1.2. 4.5.1 Configuring HART variables Introduction Numerous HART field devices make available additional measurement variables (e.g. sensor temperature). These can be read if they are set accordingly in the field device configuration in SIMATIC PDM. Using the HART variables it is possible to adopt the set measured values directly from the field device into the I/O area of your automation system. A maximum of 8 HART variables can be configured for HART modules. You assign the HART variables to a channel in the properties dialog for the module. Address assignment The HART modules use 16 input/output bytes (user data). If you configure HART variables, the modules use an additional 5 bytes of input data for each HART variable. If you use all 8 HART variables, the HART modules use a total of 56 input bytes (16 bytes + 8 x 5 bytes = 56 bytes). The "None" configuration occupies no additional input bytes. 204 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 No HART variables are placed in the user data area for configuration in run (CIR). However, an additional 5 bytes of address space are reserved for a subsequent re-configuration. Configuration of HART variables You assign the HART variables in STEP 7 HW Config. You can configure up to 4 HART variables for each channel PV (Primary Variable) SV (Secondary Variable) TV (Tertiary Variable) QV (Quaternary Variable) If you want to assign the HART variable later in the user program, use the CiR parameter. CiR is a placeholder that reserves the address space for a HART variable. You must configure the HART variables you are not using with the "None" parameter. Example of a configuration of HART variables The figure below shows an example for the configuration of HART variables. Image 4-19 Example of a configuration of HART variables S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 205 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Structure of HART variables Each HART variable uses 5 bytes of input data and is structured as follows: %\WHQ %\WHQ %\WHQ %\WHQ +$57YDULDEOH 4XDOLW\FRGH %\WHQ 9DOXHLQ+(;IRUPDW Structure of the "Quality Code" byte The Quality Code (QC) can assume the following values: Quality Code (QC) Meaning 0x4C or 0 Initialization: 0 value of IM and 4C of module 0x18 Communication cancelled / no communication 0x0C Fault in HART device 0x47 HART device is busy 0x84 OK "Configuration changed" 0x80 OK Reassign HART variables in RUN mode You can reassign HART variables in RUN mode in S7-400 automation systems with CiR capability and also in S7-400H systems. Requirement: HART variable must already be configured in HW Config as PV, SV, TV, QV, or CiR. 4.5.2 Parameters of HART Analog Modules Overview The following tables contain the parameters of the HART analog input module and the parameters of the HART analog output module. The tables show which parameters can be set for the module as a whole and which parameters can be set separately for each channel. You can find general information on parameter assignment in the description of the SIMATIC analog modules in the Manual Automation System SIMATIC S7-300 Module Data. 206 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Table 4-16 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Parameter Value range Default setting Type of pa Effective range rameter Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module Hardware interrupt triggered by limit violation Yes/no No End-of-cycle hardware interrupt Yes/no No At 0 to 20mA: 23.52 to -3.52mA Overflow (32767) Dynamic Channel Static Channel Dynamic Channel Dynamic Channel Basic settings enables Limit for hardware interrupt High limit At 4 to 20mA: 22.81 to 1.185mA Low limit At 0 to 20mA: -3.52 to 23.52mA Underflow (-32768) At 4 to 20mA: 1.185 to 22.81mA Diagnostics Yes/no No with wire break monitoring Yes/no No Yes/no No Deactivated 4DMU (4-wire trans ducer) Group diagnostics HART group diagnostics Measurement Measurement type 4DMU (4-wire transducer) 2DMU (2-wire transducer) Measuring range Deactivated 4 to 20 mA 0...20 mA (can only be set with 4DMU) 4 to 20mA Integration time / Interference frequency suppression 2.5 ms; 16.6 ms; 20 ms; 100 ms 20 ms Corresponds to Interference fre quency suppres sion From 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz HART HART function Yes/no Yes Retries 0-255 10 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 207 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Wire break check The wire break check is only possible if group diagnostics is enabled and the measuring range is 4 to 20mA. HART function The HART functionality is only possible in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA. When the HART function is activated, the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, cyclically followed by HART command 3. Once a correct communication with the HART field device is established, the green HART status display lights up. HART group diagnostics HART group diagnostics refers to the HART communication and is possible for a selected HART function even when group diagnostics are not activated. If the HART function is not selected, no HART group diagnostics are possible. Parameters of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Table 4-17 Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Parameter Value range Default set ting Type of parameter Effective range Yes/no No Dynamic Module Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel HART group diagnostics Yes/no No Deactivated Current Dynamic Channel Basic settings enable Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostics Output Output mode Current Output range 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Reaction to CPU STOP Output with zero current and volt age (OCV) Set substitu tion value (SSV) Keep last value (KLV) Set substitution value (SSV) Substitute value 0 to 20mA 0mA HART 208 HART function Yes/no Yes Retries 0-255 10 Dynamic Channel S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 HART function HART is only possible in the output range 4 to 20mA. When the HART function is activated, the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, cyclically followed by HART command 3. Once a correct communication with the HART field device is established, the green HART status display lights up. HART group diagnostics HART group diagnostics refers to the HART communication and is possible for a selected HART function even when group diagnostics are not activated. If the HART function is not selected, no HART group diagnostics are possible. 4.5.3 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules Overview of diagnostic functions If errors occur during configuration or parameter assignment, or during the operating phase, you can use diagnostics to determine the cause of the error. The general diagnostic behavior of the HART analog module corresponds to that of the other SIMATIC S7-Ex analog modules. Diagnostic messages to which parameters can and cannot be assigned We distinguish between diagnostic messages to which parameters can be assigned and those to which they cannot be assigned. You only obtain configurable diagnostic messages if you have enabled diagnostics at the relevant parameters. Assign the parameters in the "Diagnostics" configuration dialog in STEP 7. The analog module always provides non-configurable diagnostic messages, regardless of the enable state of diagnostic functions. Actions after a diagnostic message in STEP 7 Every diagnostic message initiates the following actions: The diagnostic message is entered into the diagnostics of the analog module. The group error LED (SF LED) on the analog module is lit. The channel error LED also lights for channel-specific errors. When "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" is set in STEP 7, the system triggers a diagnostic interrupt and calls the OB 82 in the CPU. Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors, regardless of parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a disabled channel. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 209 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Diagnostic message via LED The analog modules indicate module-specific as well as channel-specific errors with their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights up as soon as the analog module detects an error. It goes out once all errors are resolved. In addition, channel-specific errors are displayed via the corresponding channel error LED. "Analog" diagnostic messages Table 4-18 "Analog" diagnostic messages Diagnostic message Effective range of diag nostics Configurable External auxiliary voltage missing Module No Parameter assignment error Channel No Wire break Channel Yes Underflow (only with analog input and if no wire break check is enabled) Channel Yes Overflow (only with analog input) Channel Yes Module not configured Incorrect parameters Time watchdog tripped EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Overflow Acquired analog values above 23.52 mA (for measuring range 0 to 20 mA) or 22.81 mA (for the measuring range 4 to 20mA) are reported as "overflow" if group diagnostics are enabled. The analog value is set to 0x7FFF. It has no effect on the HART communication. Underflow A current less than 1.1845 mA is reported as "underflow" if group diagnostics are enabled and wire break diagnostics are disabled. The analog value is set to 0x8000. No HART communication is possible below 1.1845 mA. Wire break A current less than 3.6 mA is reported as "wire break" with analog input if group diagnostics and wire break diagnostics are enabled. Wire break is reported as cleared for a current higher than 3.8 mA. The analog value is set to 0x7FFF for "wire break". HART communication is active up to 1.1845 mA. 210 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 A wire break check is performed for analog output in the measuring range 4 to 20mA if group diagnostics are enabled . A wire break is reported for a current lower than approximately 500 A. No HART communication is possible with "wire break". Causes of error and remedies for "analog" diagnostic messages Table 4-19 Diagnostic messages of analog input module, causes of error and remedies Diagnostic message Possible cause of error external auxiliary volt age missing No load voltage L+ in the module Provide L+ supply Module not configured Startup error Incorrect parameters Implausible parameter or combi Program the module nation thereof Time watchdog tripped RAM error partially high electromagnetic in Eliminate interference sources terference Replace the module Module defective ADC/DAC error Module defective Replace the module Hardware interrupt lost Hardware interrupts are trig gered faster than the CPU can process them Check the system, if necessary, use a more powerful CPU Parameter assignment error A parameter or combination of Check parameters and transfer them to parameters of parameter data re the module again cord 1 is implausible EPROM error Remedy Program the module A parameter of the HART param eter data records (131/132) is in correct Wire break Resistance of transducer circuit too high Use a different type of sensor or modify the wiring, for example, using a larger conductor cross-section Break in the line between the module and sensor Connect line Channel not connected (open) Disable channel ("Measuring type" pa rameter) Wire the channel Underflow Input value below underflow range, error possibly caused by: Configure a different measuring range Wrong measuring range setting Overflow S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 The sensor could be connected the wrong way in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA Check connection terminals Input value exceeds overflow range Configure a different measuring range 211 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 "HART" diagnostic messages Table 4-20 Additional HART diagnostic messages of the analog input module Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnos Configurable tics HART communication error Channel Yes Main variable outside limits Secondary value outside of limits Analog output saturated Analog output fixed current intensity Further status information available Configuration changed Field device malfunction HART communication error Communication error with HART field device of HART group diagnostics are enabled. All remaining HART diagnostic messages are reported by the connected field device in the HART status bytes and displayed by the analog module as a diagnostic result. HART status bytes Each HART command is followed by a HART reply that contains data and two status bytes. The status bytes provide information regarding Device status of the connected field device (e.g. parameter modification) Communication error during transmission between the HART analog module and the connected field device Command error in the interpretation of the HART command through the connected field device (warning rather than error message). The HART status bytes are accepted unchanged in the HART reply record. Their significance is described in the technical specifications for HART. 212 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Causes of error and remedies with "HART" diagnostic messages The following table contains the possible causes of the errors described in the additional diagnostic messages and the remedies. Table 4-21 Additional HART diagnostic messages, possible causes of errors and remedies Diagnostic message Possible cause of error / diagnostics Corrective measures HART communication er HART field device not ror responding Timing error Check the process wiring Correct the parameter assignment. Current less than 1.1845 mA Increase number of assigned retries Analog input: Connect a capacitor of approximately 150 nF in parallel to the transducer S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 213 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Main variable outside lim Incorrect parameters in the its HART device HART device has simulation, and simulation is set to "Primary variable outside the limits" Incorrect measuring point Check the parameter assignment of the HART device Correct simulation Check whether the correct sensor is connected Primary variable parameterized outside the limits Secondary value outside of limits Incorrect parameters in the HART device HART device has simulation, and simulation is set to "Nonprimary variable outside the limits" Incorrect measuring point Primary variable parameterized outside the limits Analog output saturated Incorrect parameters in the HART device HART device has simulation, and the measured value set for the simulation is too high Incorrect measuring point Primary variable parameterized outside the limits Analog output fixed cur rent intensity Incorrect parameters in the HART device HART device has simulation, and the measured value set for the simulation is too high Incorrect measuring point Primary variable parameterized outside the limits Further status informa tion available HART device supplies further status. Read out status and correct, if necessary Configuration changed The identifier for the parameter mod ification of the HART field device was set in the HART device status (= HART status bytes). If you do not want diagnostic inter rupts to be triggered when parame ters are modified, you should disa ble the diagnostic interrupt. Field device malfunction Communication and command error during HART operation affecting the connected HART field devices. For detailed information analyze the reply record of the corresponding cli ent or the diagnostic data record. (deleted after 3 s) 214 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 See also Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 124) HART Communication Data Records (Page 194) Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198) Diagnostic data records (Page 192) 4.5.4 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules Overview of the interrupts The interrupt response of the HART analog module is similar to that of SIMATIC S7 Ex analog modules. You can set parameters to enable or disable any interrupt. Hardware interrupts with AI-HART In this context we distinguish between the "out-of-limits hardware interrupt" and the "end-ofcycle hardware interrupt". You can evaluate the local data in OB40 when a hardware interrupt is active. Table 4-22 Local data in OB40 Local data OB40 Bit 7 ...2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Limit Byte 0 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 High limit exceeded Byte 1 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 Low limit exceeded Byte 2 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant Byte 3 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant At the end of the cycle all the bits in bytes 0-3 of the additional information for OB 40 which are not reserved for channels 0 and 1 are set to "1". You can use the reserved bits to evaluate whether the upper or lower limit set has been exceeded for a particular channel: if a limit has been exceeded, a "1" is displayed instead of a "0". See also Interrupts of analog modules (Page 128) Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171) 4.5.5 HART Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0) Order number 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 215 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Features The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART is characterized by the following features: 2 inputs in 2 channel groups 2 encoder supply outputs for 2-wire transducers The resolution of the measured value can be set separately at each channel (see "Analog values and resolution") Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group: - 2-wire transducer current - 4-wire transducer current - Channel deactivated User-specific measuring range per channel - 0 ... 20 mA (only for 4-wire transducer) - 4 ... 20 mA HART functionality (only for 4 to 20 mA) - Support for HART 5 to HART 7 - Configuring HART variables Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt - Group diagnostics - Additional wire break monitoring - Diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt - Channels 0 and 1 with limit monitoring: Programmable generation of out-of-limits hardware interrupts - Programmable end-of-cycle hardware interrupt Electrical isolation - Channels electrically isolated - Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+ Configuration in Run (CiR) supported 216 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Analog values and resolution The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the input value for the HART analog input module is 15 bits + sign. Table 4-23 Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Selected measuring type Measuring range 2-wire transducer 4 to 20 mA 4-wire transducer 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Integration times when HART is used When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program integration times of 100 ms to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal to a minimum. Default settings HART measurement is set by default. There are other default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog module uses these settings when no parameter modification is carried out in STEP 7. Wire break check Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA. For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, undershooting the input current of I 3.6 mA is interpreted as a wire break. When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, the module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 217 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA 60 $,[P$+$57 ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU + ZLUH ZLUH &+ 0 ZLUH 0 ZLUH / ZLUH $'8 02 '(0 / 0 /RJLFDQG EDFN SODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH 0 ZLUH 0LQWHUQDO ; 7%$% 0 ZLUH + ,QSXWb / 9LQWHUQDO ) / / 02 '(0 [ / 0 ) ,QSXWb / ZLUH (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ ZLUH 6) 0 0 ZLUH &+ ZLUH ZLUH 6) ) (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ + 0 0 0 6)JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUGLVSOD\V>UHG@ + +$57VWDWXVGLVSOD\>JUHHQ@ Image 4-20 Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Note The 200 ohm resistor must be in the measuring circuit when using HART transducers. This means that a 2-wire HART transducer must be connected to terminals 3 and 5 (12 and 14) and a 4-wire HART transducer to terminals 5 and 6 (14 and 15). The 200 ohm resistor is optional in the measuring circuit for standard transducers without HART. Note Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation. 218 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Special feature for the connection of active encoders Lock the unused transducer outputs at terminals 3 and 12 with plastic bolts if you connect active encoders to the SM 331-7TB00 module (6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0). You can use M3 x 8 plastic screws, for example (see the diagram below). Note that these measures reduce safety-relevant data of the module. For information on safety data, refer to the first amendment of the certificate. 1 3 6 5 12 4 2 3 Load voltage supply Process connector with screw-type connection Ex (i) process cable Intrinsically safe area Line chamber Plastic screw M 3 x 8 Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. Technical specifications of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0) Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight approx. 260 g Module-specific data S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 219 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before the parameters were set. Number of inputs 2 Number of power outputs 2 Line length, shielded Max. 400 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 97ATEX3039 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 VDC Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Reverse voltage protection Yes 2-wire transducer power supply short circuit-proof Yes (approx. 30 mA) Electrical isolation Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels Yes Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes Between the backplane bus and load voltage L Yes + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L 60 VDC 30 VAC + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area Between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC Between channels 300 VDC 250 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L 75 VDC 60 VAC + Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules 220 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L 75 VDC 60 VAC + Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L + With 2500 VDC Channels to each other With 2500 VDC Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC Current input From backplane bus Max. 100 mA From load voltage L + Max. 180 mA Module power loss typical 4.5 W Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate 97ATEX3039 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http:// support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values per channel U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 26 V I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 96.1 mA P0 (power under load) Max. 511 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 3 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 62 nF Um (fault voltage) Max. DC 250V Ta (permissible ambient temperature) 0 to 60C Analog value formation Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Configurable Yes Yes Yes Yes Integration time in ms 2.5 16 2/3 20 100 Basic conversion time plus integration time in ms (one channel enabled) 2.5 16 2/3 20 100 Basic conversion time including integration time in ms (2 channels enabled) 7.5 50 60 300 Resolution in bits +sign (including the overshoot range) 10 +sign 13+ sign 13+ sign 15+sign 400 60 50 10 Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 221 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Interference suppression, error limits Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) Common mode interference between channels and reference ground M of the CPU (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB Series mode interference (measured value + interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to 22 mA input range) > 60 dB Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB Operational limit (in total temperature range, based on input range) from 0/4...20mA 0.45% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 C, based on input range) from 0/4...20mA 0.1% Temperature error (based on input range) 0.01%/K Linearity error (based on input range) 0.01% Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C, based on input range) 0.05% Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range Error at integration time 2.5 ms 0.25% 16 2/3 ms 0.05% 20 ms 0.04% 100 ms 0.02% Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 1 Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error display Red LED (SF) Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readable Possible HART communication active and OK Green LED (H) Technical date of the transducer power supply No-load voltage < 29.6 V Output voltage for transducers and cables at 22 mA transducer current (50 W measurement resistance on module included) > 15 V Data for sensor selection Input ranges (rated values / input resistance) Current 0 to 20 mA; /50 4 to 20 mA: /50 Permissible input current for current input (destruc 40 mA tion limit) 222 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Connection of signal transducers for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Possible as 4-wire transducer Possible See also Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 90) The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916) 4.5.6 HART Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0) Order number 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0 Features The HART analog output module has the following features: 2 current outputs in 2 channel groups Resolution 12 bit (+ sign) Output type selectable per channel: - Current output - Channel deactivated Selection of any output range per channel - 0 to 20 mA - 4 to 20 mA HART functionality - Support for HART 5 to HART 7 - Configuring HART variables Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt - Group diagnostics - Diagnostic interrupt S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 223 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Electrical isolation - Channels electrically isolated - Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+ Read-back capability of the analog outputs Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Analog values and resolution The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the output value for the HART analog output module is, however, 12 bit. Table 4-24 Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA Selected output mode Current Output range 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Default settings The output type HART is the default setting. There are also default settings for substitute value, diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog output module uses these settings when no parameters have been changed in STEP 7. Wire break check Wire break check is possible for the output range 4 to 20 mA. Effect of a falling load voltage on the diagnostic message When the 24 V load voltage falls under the permissible rated range (< 20.4 V), if loads > 650 are connected and there are output currents > 20 mA, the output current may be reduced before a diagnostic message is issued. Readback capability The analog outputs can be read back in the user data range (+ sign) with a resolution of 8 bit. Note that the value read back from the analog output is only available at the corresponding accuracy when the conversion cycle is completed. 224 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Wiring diagram of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 60 $2[P$+$57 6) / 0 ) 2XWSXW ' + / $ &+ 0RGHP / / 4, 0 &+ +$57 ,VRODWLQJ DPSOLILHU [ /RJLFDQG EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH ) 2XWSXW + 6) 'LJLWDOWR DQDORJ FRQYHUWHU / 0 ' $ 0RGHP ) &+ 4, 0 &+ +$57 + ; 7%$% (OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ 0 0 0 6)JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\>UHG@ ) FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUGLVSOD\V>UHG@ + +$57VWDWXVGLVSOD\>JUHHQ@ Image 4-21 Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART Note Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation. Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 225 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Non-wired output channels To ensure that non-wired output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART are deenergized, you have to deactivate them. You deactivate an output channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block. Technical specifications of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0) Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight Approx. 280 g Module-specific data Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR They output the output value that applied before the parameters were set. Number of outputs 2 Line length, shielded Max. 400 m ATEX approvals II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Test number KEMA 97ATEX2359 X FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Voltages, currents, potentials Bus power supply 5 VDC Rated load voltage 24 VDC Reverse voltage protection Yes Electrical isolation Between the channels and backplane bus Yes Between the channels Yes Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ Yes Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the channels 60 VDC 30 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC 30 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area 226 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Between channels and backplane bus 300 VDC 250 VAC Between channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC 250 VAC Between channels 300 VDC 250 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the channels 150 VDC 150 VAC Between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L With 2500 VDC + Channels to each other With 2500 VDC Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC Channels with respect to shield With 500 VDC Current input From backplane bus Max. 100 mA From load voltage L+ (at rated data) Max. 150 mA Module power loss Typical 3.5 W Analog value formation Output value Resolution (including overrange) 12 bit (+ sign) Cycle time (all channels) 5 ms Transient recovery time for resistive load 2.5 ms For inductive load 2.5 ms For capacitive load 4 ms Set substitute values Yes, configurable Readback value Resolution 8 bit (+ sign) Conversion time (per channel) 40 ms Interference suppression, error limits Crosstalk attenuation between the outputs >130 dB Operational limit (across temperature range, rela 0.55% tive to output range) Intrinsic error limit (operating error limit at 25C relative to the output range) S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 0.15% 227 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Temperature error (relative to the output range) 0.01%/K Linearity error (based on output range) 0.03% Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25C, based on output range) 0.005% Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (based on output range) 0.02% Interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error display Red LED (SF) Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel Diagnostic information readable Possible Monitoring for Wire break From output value Yes HART communication active and OK Green LED (H) > 0.5 mA Safety specifications (see EU special test certificate KEMA 97ATEX2359 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)) Maximum values of the output circuits (per chan nel) U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 19 V I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 66 mA P0 (power under load) Max. 506 mW L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 7.5 mH C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 230 nF Um (fault voltage) Max. 60 VDC Ta (permissible ambient temperature) Max. 60C Data for actuator selection Output ranges (rated values) Current 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Load impedance (in rated range of output) for current outputs - Resistive load Max. 650 - Inductive load Max. 7.5 mH1 Capacitive load Max. 230 nF1 Current output No-load voltage Max. 19 V Destruction limit for externally applied voltages / currents 228 Voltages Max. + 17 V / - 0.5 V Current Max. + 60 mA / - 1A S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Wiring of actuators For current output 2-wire connection Yes KEMA approval limitations can be set as the load when used in non-ex areas 1 Inductive load max. 15 mH Capacitive load max. 3 F *) *) HART communication no longer possible, however See also The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14) Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs (Page 102) Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171) HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 14044916) 4.5.7 Data record interface Introduction This section contains specific data you need for programming, diagnostics and HART communication if you want to extend the functionality of STEP7 standard applications or deploy your own software tool for HART communication. Configuration and parameter assignment with STEP 7 You can configure and parameterize the HART analog modules with STEP 7. The integrated help system supports you in this. You can integrate certain additional functions for writing parameters and reading diagnostic data in your user program by means of SFCs. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 229 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Reading and writing records To read and write records, use the following SFCs / SFBs: Read record: - SFC 59 "RD_REC - SFB 52 "RDREC" ( mandatory for Profinet ! ) Write record: - SFB 53 "WRREC" ( mandatory for Profinet ! ) - SFC 55 "WR_PARAM" - SFC 58 "WR_REC" 230 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 4.5.7.1 Parameter Data Records Structure of the parameter records 0/1 for the HART analog input The figures below show data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the dynamic parameters for AI-HART and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mage 4-22 Parameters of the HART analog input module Table 4-25 Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module Measurement type Code Measuring range Code Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000 4-wire transducer 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA with HART 2#0010 2#0011 2#0111 2-wire transducer 2#0011 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA with HART 2#0011 2#0111 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 231 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog output The figure below shows data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the dynamic parameters. 3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG %\WH %\WH *URXSGLDJQRVWLFV &KDQQHO &KDQQHO +$57GLDJQRVWLFHQDEOHFKDQQHO +$57GLDJQRVWLFHQDEOHFKDQQHO 3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG %\WH (QDEOH (QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW %\WH 5HDFWLRQWR &386723 2'DFWLYH &KDQQHO &KDQQHO VXEVWLWXWHYDOXH NHHSODVWYDOXH %\WH %\WH 2XWSXWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO %\WH 1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHVFKDQQHO VHHWKHIROORZLQJ WDEOH 2XWSXWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO %\WH 1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHVFKDQQHO %\WH WR %\WH 6XEVWLWXWHYDOXHFKDQQHO 6XEVWLWXWHYDOXHFKDQQHO 0XVWEH 0XVWEH 0XVWEH 0XVWEH %\WH WR %\WH ILUVWKLJKE\WH WKHQORZE\WH UHVHUYHG UHVHUYHG 7KHRXWSXWVDUHGHHQHUJL]HGZLWKDVXEVWLWXWHYDOXHRI (+H[ Image 4-23 Parameters of the HART analog output module Table 4-26 Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module Output mode 232 Code Output range Code Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000 Current output 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA with HART 2#0010 2#0011 2#0111 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Structure of the HART parameter data records 131/132 There is a specific HART parameter data record for each channel: Data record 131: HART parameter data for channel 0 Data record 132: HART parameter data for channel 1 %\WH 0XVWEH %LWLVUHVHWDIWHUHYDOXDWLRQRIWKHGDWD UHFRUGE\WKHPRGXOH %\WH 0XVWEH 2IIVHWIRUPDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFSDUDPHWHUV DFFRUGLQJWR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ 1XPEHURIUHWULHVIRU+$57 FRPPXQLFDWLRQ WR ,QLWLDOYDOXHIURPSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG %\WH 1XPEHURISUHDPEOHE\WHV WR ,QLWLDOYDOXH %\WH %\WH 0XVWEH &OLHQWWLPHRXWLQV WRV ,QLWLDOYDOXH V %\WH %\WH )LHOGGHYLFHPRGHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ $FWLYDWH+$57 'HDFWLYDWH+$57 3ULPDU\PDVWHU 6HFRQGDU\PDVWHU %\WH Image 4-24 0XVWEH ,QLWLDOYDOXHDFFRUGLQJWR+$57 $FWLYDWLRQIURPWKH SDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG DOZD\VDVSULPDU\PDVWHU 5HVHUYHG Data record These records are not absolutely necessary for the HART operation. If these records are not transferred to the module after module startup, the HART interface works with the specified initial values. The number of HART retries and the HART enable are used in accordance with the parameter data record 1. However, both HART parameter data records can write to the module at any time during operation for each data record (for example, using SFC 58 "WR_REC"). The parameters are applied accordingly by the respective HART channel and overwrite the values currently in effect. This way you can also adjust the "Number of preamble bytes", the "Client timeout" as well as the HART mode to suit your needs. The transferred HART parameters are not used if an error occurs in DR131 / DR132. The previous values remain in effect. The error is reported as channel-specific parameter assignment error in diagnostic data record 1. Each new parameter assignment with parameter data record 1 sets the HART parameters back to the "initial values". S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 233 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 4.5.7.2 Diagnostic data records Structure and contents of the diagnostic data The diagnostic data of a module consists of the data records 0 and 1: Data record 0 has a length of 4 bytes and contains system-specific diagnostic data: 4 bytes that are defined system-wide and are valid for HART analog input and output. Data record 1 has a length of 16 bytes and contains - 4 bytes of diagnostic data for an S7-300, which are also in data record 0 and another - 8 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data Diagnostic data record DS0 / DS1 %\WH 0RGXOHPDOIXQFWLRQ ,QWHUQDOHUURU ([WHUQDOHUURU &KDQQHOIDXOW ([WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ 0RGXOHQRWFRQILJXUHG ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHULQWKHPRGXOH %\WH 0RGXOHFODVV&3 &KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH %\WH 0RGXOHF\FOHWLPHPRQLWRULQJ ZDWFKGRJ DFWLYDWHG 0RGXOHKDVQRLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH %\WH 3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH (3520HUURU 5$0HUURU $'&'$&HUURU )XVHEORZQ +DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWORVW RQO\ZLWKDQDORJLQSXW Image 4-25 234 Diagnostic data: data record 0 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Diagnostic data: data record DS1 The following diagram shows the contents of bytes 4 to 11 of the diagnostic data. Bytes 12 to 15 are always zero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mage 4-26 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 &KDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUVIRUFKDQQHO $OORFDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRFKDQQHO VHHE\WHVDQG Diagnostic data: data record 1 235 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Note Please note the following points regarding diagnostic data: If a HART channel error occurs, you can obtain further information by using SFC59 / SFB 52 to read the status in the HART response data record for the relevant client or the additional diagnostic data record for the relevant channel. See also HART communication and information data records (Page 236) 4.5.7.3 HART communication and information data records Overview The mapping of HART commands and HART responses to S7 data records is based on the PROFIBUS Profile HART Version 1.0. You can find more information on the HART protocol in the PROFIBUS DP HART Profile Application Guidelines. You can obtain this documentation from the PNO (PROFIBUS Users Organization) on the Internet at http://www.profibus.com. Table 4-27 Overview Data record number Read/write Size in bytes Name 148 Read 13 Directory Process Data DR information (directory record): This data record contains the record numbers (in dex) of all HART data records and information on numbers and revisions. 149 Read 3 HMD Feature Parameter Process Data Optional HART functions (HART feature flags): This data record describes which op tional HART functions are supported and specifies the maximum data field length of the request/response records. 80, 82 Write 240 HART Request Write Process Data HART request records to field devices: These records contain by channel (0 - 1) the transfer data for the command from the client to the HART field device. 81, 83 Read 240 HART Response Read Process Data HART response records from field devices: These records contain by channel (0 - 1) the transfer data for the reply from the HART field device to the client. Coordination rules for HART communication HART communication can be operated only by one client per channel. Each channel has a separate transfer area available. Each transfer area consists of the command and reply data records. 236 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 If a channel is operated by several clients, the reply made available by the module cannot be securely allocated to one client. The module does not support client management, refer to data record number 149 (HMD Feature Parameter Process Data). Each client / channel is allocated fixed data record numbers: Channel Client Data record 0 Command 80 0 Response 81 1 Command 82 1 Response 83 After having written a command data record, the client must read the response data record before it writes the next command data record. The client can evaluate the "processing status" in the reply data record: if the "processing state" indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current response data or error bits respectively. All data must be read, because the module can modify the data record if the initial read operation returns a successful or faulty state. The status component in the reply record (= HART status bytes) provides information on whether and which errors have occurred. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 237 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Structure of the command data record The following diagram shows the structure of the data record, which you can use to write a command in the transfer area of a client. The HART analog module transmits the command to the connected HART field device. %\WH 7UDQVSDUHQW0HVVDJH)RUPDW &RPSDFW0HVVDJH)RUPDW $FWLYDWH6+&VHTXHQFH %\WH 1XPEHURISUHDPEOHE\WHV WR %\WH WR &RPPDQGGDWDDFFRUGLQJWR WKH+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ /HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHV PD[E\WHV %\WH * HART commands are processed both in Transparent Message Format and in the Compact Message Format, see technical specification for HART. The response data from the module, however, is always provided in the transparent format. ** Processing a sequence of HART commands as a SHC sequence (Successive HART Command Mode) Image 4-27 Command data record of the HART analog module SHC sequence If a HART command is sent to the module with a set SHC bit, then this channel is reserved for HART commands for 2 seconds. This means that no internal HART command (command 3) is sent to the transducer with this channel. Each time a HART command with a set SHC bit is sent, the module once again reserves this channel for another 2 seconds for the HART commands. If a HART command without a set SHC bit is detected for this channel, or if no further command for this channel occurs within 2 seconds after the previous HART command, then command 3 is cyclically sent to the transducer for reading the HART variables for the channel. Notes on the command The same client must not send a second command until the response to any previous command has been read. 238 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Notes on response Always make sure that you are reading the current response data record. If the processing state in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current response data or error messages respectively. Structure of the response data record The following figure shows the structure of the response data record, which contains the response to the HART command you sent previously and any error or status bits. %\WH 3URFHVVLQJVWDWXV UHVSRQVHFRQWURO %LWV LQDFWLYH LQDFWLYHUHVHUYHG ZDLWLQJ ZDLWLQJUXQQLQJ VXFFHVVIXOZLWKGDWD VXFFHVVIXOZLWKRXWGDWD IDXOW\ZLWKGDWD IDXOW\ZLWKRXWGDWD 3URFHVVLQJVWDWXV 6+&VHTXHQFHLVDFWLYH 6+&VHTXHQFHLVLQDFWLYH %\WH +$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\V H[WHQGHGUHVSRQVHFRQWURO 6HHWKHWDEOHRI+$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\V ,IFRPPXQLFDWLRQIDXOW\ %\WH +$57SURWRFROHUURUDWUHVSRQVH HUURUFRGH IURPILHOGGHYLFHWRPRGXOH 6HHWKHWDEOHRI+$57SURWRFROHUURUV ,IFRPPXQLFDWLRQVXFFHVVIXO %\WH WR %\WH Image 4-28 5HVSRQVHGDWDDFFRUGLQJWR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ +$57UHVSRQVHIUDPH /HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHVPD[E\WHV PD[E\WHV Response data record of the HART analog modules Evaluating the response data When you have an up-to-date response data record, you can check the following: Look for the "last command" entry to verify that the response belongs to the command sent. You can evaluate the "Group error bits" (see following table) to locate individual errors. You can obtain more information from "HART protocol errors during response" (see following table) and both HART status bytes. In the group error bytes the corresponding bits will be set to "1". S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 239 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 Table 4-28 HART group error displays in response byte 1 (extended response control) Bit no. HART group error display Meaning 0 Further status information available Corresponds to bit 4 in the channel-specific error bytes in diagnostic data record 1 (2nd HART sta tus byte). The HART command 48 provides you with further status information, if required. 1 HART communication error --> HART The field device has detected a communication communication error entry in diagnos error while receiving the command. The error in tic data record 1 formation is contained in the 1st HART status byte (in the reply record or diagnostic data record 1) which is accepted without changes. 2 Parameter check 0: HMD parameters unchanged 1: Check HMD parameters 3 Always 0 Reserved 4-7 HART protocol error for reply --> HART Error during HART communication between field communication error entry in diagnos device and module, i.e. the response was incor tic data record 1 rectly received. 0: Unspecified error 1: HMD error 2: Channel error 3: Command error 4: Query error 5: Response error 6: Query rejected 7: Profile query rejected 8: Vendor-specific query rejected 9 - 15: Not used You can find information on the cause of the error in response byte 2. See the table below. Table 4-29 240 HART protocol error in response byte 2 for the response from the field device to the module (error code) Error HART protocol error in byte 2 Meaning 0 Unspecified error 0: Not specified 1 HMD error 0: Unspecified 1: Internal communication error 2: Parameter assignment error 3: HW error 4: Wait time expired 5: HART timer expired 2 Channel fault 0: Unspecified 1: Line error 2: Short circuit 3: Open line 4: Low current output 5: Parameter assignment error 3 Command error 0-127: HART protocol, Bit 7=0 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 4.5.7.4 Error HART protocol error in byte 2 Meaning 4 Query error HART protocol, Bit 7=1 Bit 0: Reserved Bit 1: Receive buffer overflow Bit 2: Reserved Bit 3: Checksum error Bit 4: Frame error Bit 5: Overflow error Bit 6: Parity error Bit 7: 1 5 Reply error HART protocol, Bit 7=1 Bit 0: GAP timeout Bit 1: Receive buffer overflow Bit 2: Timeout Bit 3: Checksum error Bit 4: Frame error Bit 5: Overflow error Bit 6: Parity error Bit 7: 1 6 Query rejected 0: Unspecified 1: Short format not supported 2: SHC not supported 3: Impermissible command 4: No resources 7 Profile query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported) 8 Vendor-specific query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported) Example of HART programming For the HART channel 0, the command 01 is to be sent in Transparent Message Format to the HART device with the address "98 CF 38 84 F0". A positive edge at input 4.0 of a digital input module leads to the writing of the HART command. The following assumptions are made: The module address of the HART analog module in the ET 200M is 512 (200H). The record is stored in DB80: starting at address 0.0, length 11 bytes. In this example, DB80 (request record for channel 0) consists of 11 bytes. Table 4-30 FC80: Writing of the record to DB80 with SFC 58 STL Explanation A I 4.0 FP M 101.0 = M 104.0 m2: CALL SFC 58 REQ :=M104.0 Write request IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address of the HART-AI RECNUM :=B#16#50 Data record number 80 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 241 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 STL Explanation RECORD :=P#DB80.DBX0.0 BYTE 11 Data record with length of 11 bytes (must correspond to the exact length that is to be transferred) RET_VAL :=MW93 RET_VAL of SFC 58 (OK/error/...) BUSY :=M51.0 Write operation not yet completed U M 51.0 SPB m2 BE Table 4-31 DB80: Transparent Message Format Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex) 0 00 Req_Control (00 = Transparent Message Format. 40 = Transparent Message Format with SHC sequence) 1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14) 2 82 Start character (02 = Short Frame with command 0) (82 = Long Frame with other commands) 3 98 4 CF 5 38 Address (with command 0, the address is exactly 1 byte long and has the value 0.) 6 84 7 F0 8 01 Command (CMD) 9 00 Length in bytes 10 98 Check sum (CHK) (calculated starting from byte 2 "Start character" up to the next to last byte) A HART command can also be sent in Compact Message Format. In this case, the data that is to be transferred via DB 80 is reduced to 4 bytes. Table 4-32 242 DB80: Compact Message Format Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex) 0 20 Req_Control (20 = Compact Message Format. 60 = Compact Message Format with SHC sequence) 1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14) 2 01 Command (CMD) 3 00 Length in bytes S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 You can find out when the reply was received by cyclically reading record DS81 for HART channel 0. The response is always supplied in Transparent Message Format. Table 4-33 FC81: Reading of the reply to DB81 with SFC 59 STL Explanation m3: CALL SFC 59 REQ :=1 Read request IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address of the HART-AI RECNUM :=B#16#51 Data record number 81 RECORD :=P#DB81.DBX0.0 BYTE 75 Data record RET_VAL :=MW100 RET_VAL of SFC 59 (OK/error/...) BUSY :=M49.1 Read operation not yet completed U M 49.1 SPB m3 BE The program part U M 49.1 to SPB m3 is only required if reading is to occur synchronously. As long as "0x03" is in byte 0 of DB81, the reply has not been received from the field device. Once bit 2 = 1 in byte 0, positive response data are available from field devices, which you can evaluate. If the response data is invalid, see Tables "HART group error displays in response byte 1 (extended response control)" or "HART protocol error in response byte 2 in response from the field device to the module (error code)" in this manual. 4.5.7.5 User data interface User data interface - input area (read) Structure of the user data The figure below shows the structure of the input user data area of the HART analog modules beginning with the correspondingly configured module address. If you have configured HART variables, then these are made available justified after byte 15. Each configured HART variable uses 5 input bytes, see section 4.5.1. You can read in the data of the user data area (e.g. with L PEW 256) and evaluate it in your user program. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 243 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 &KDQQHO $QDORJLQSXWYDOXH IRU$,+$57 5HDGEDFNYDOXH IRU$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW &KDQQHO $QDORJLQSXWYDOXH IRU$,+$57 5HDGEDFNYDOXH IRU$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH +$57YDULDEOH +$57SULPDU\YDULDEOH FKDQQHO 9DOXHLQIORDWLQJSRLQWIRUPDW E\WHV,((( 4XDOLW\FRGH %\WH 9DOXHLQ+H[IRUPDW IUHH %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH %\WH +$57YDULDEOH +$57SULPDU\YDULDEOH FKDQQHO 9DOXHLQIORDWLQJSRLQWIRUPDW E\WHV,((( 4XDOLW\FRGH %\WH 9DOXHLQ+H[IRUPDW %\WH Image 4-29 IUHH Input user data area of the HART analog modules User data interface, output range (writing) Structure of the user data The figure below shows the structure of the output user data area of the HART analog output module beginning with the correspondingly configured module address. You can transfer the data to the user data area in a permissible format (e.g. with T PAW 256). Both the analog input as well as the analog output occupy 16 bytes in the output area. In the case of the analog input, writing has no effect. 244 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 &KDQQHO $QDORJRXWSXWYDOXH RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW &KDQQHO $QDORJRXWSXWYDOXH RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$2+$57 %\WH %\WH 9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW %\WH %\WH Image 4-30 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 5HVHUYHG User data area of the HART analog output module 245 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7 246 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Certificates A.1 A Overview of diagnostic functions Introduction The EU special test certificates and EU certificates of conformity for the modules described in this manual can be found on the Internet: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/ en/37217116/134200) Example In the "Entry list" tab, select under filter settings: Entry type: Certificates Certificate Type: Certificates of conformity Search item(s): 6ES7321-7RB00-0AB0 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 247 Certificates A.1 Overview of diagnostic functions 248 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Standards and licenses B.1 B Standards and licenses Introduction In this section you will find standards and test values satisfied by modules of the S7-300 automation system and ET 200M. test criteria according to which the S7-300/ET 200M Ex I/O modules were tested. CE mark 0344 The automation system S7-300/ET 200M satisfies the requirements and protection goals of the following EC directives, and conforms with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable logic controllers announced in the Official Journals of the European Community: 2006/95/EC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits" (Low voltage Directive) 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) 94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Systems for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres" (Directive for Explosion Protection) The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the responsible authorities at: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik Industry Sector I IA AS R&D DH A Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg, Germany These files are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, under "Declaration of Conformity" on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/ en/37217116/134200). S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 249 Standards and licenses B.1 Standards and licenses Safety standards used The following safety standards apply to all EX modules: EN 60079-0: Electrical equipment for hazardous locations: General specifications. EN 60079-11: Electrical equipment for hazardous locations: Intrinsic safety "i". DIN EN 61010 (part 1 v. 3/94): Safety regulations for electrical measuring and control devices and laboratory equipment. DIN EN 61131 (part 2 v. 5/95): Programmable logic controllers, operational equipment requirements and testing. DIN EN 60204 (part 1 v. 6/93): Electrical equipment of machines: General requirements. Safety-related characteristic values: Uo Io Um Co Lo Po Ci Li Maximum output voltage Maximum output current Maximum r.m.s. power-frequency voltage or maximum direct voltage Maximum external capacitance Maximum external inductance Maximum output power Maximum internal capacitance Maximum internal inductance cULus HAZ. LOC. approval +$=/2& Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) UL 1604 (Hazardous Location) CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location) 250 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Standards and licenses B.1 Standards and licenses APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Note the following information. Note This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations. When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), ET 200M must be mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529. WARNING Installation Instructions according cULus WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2 This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only. FM approval Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4 Note This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) CEC (Canadian Electric Code) stipulations. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 251 Standards and licenses B.1 Standards and licenses WARNING Installation Instructions according cULus WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous. WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2 This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only. ATEX approval In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-11 (Type of protection "i") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements) II 3G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc Marking for Australia RU The S7-300/ET 200M automation system meets the requirements of the EN 61000-6-4 standard. IEC 61131 The S7-300/ET 200M automation system meets the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131-2 standard (programmable controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests). 252 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Standards and licenses B.1 Standards and licenses Marine approval Classification authorities: ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) BV (Bureau Veritas) DNV (Det Norske Veritas) GL (Germanischer Lloyd) LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai) Use in industrial environment SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments. Table B-1 Use in industrial environment Area of application Requirement for Interference emission Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2007 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005 Use in residential areas Note The S7-300/Et 200M is designed for use in industrial areas; using it in residential areas could disturb radio and TV reception. If you use the S7-300/ET 200M in residential areas, you must ensure that the radio interference emissions comply with limit value class B in accordance with EN 61000-6-3. Suitable measures for achieving RF interference Limit Class B include, for example: Install S7-300/ET 200M in grounded switching cabinets/boxes Use of filters in supply lines S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 253 Standards and licenses B.1 Standards and licenses 254 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Service & support C.1 C Service & support Technical support You can contact technical support for all A&D products using the online (http:// www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) Support Request form. Additional information on our technical support is available on the Internet (http:// www.siemens.com/automation/service). Service & support on the Internet In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base on the Internet. On the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support). There you will find: Our Newsletter, which constantly provides you with the latest information about your products. The documents you require, via our service & support search facility. A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences. Your local contact for Automation & Drives from our contact database. Information about on-site service, repairs, spare parts, and much more. Additional support If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and cannot find the answers in this documentation, please contact your Siemens partner at the appropriate office or sales and service location. The contact details for your partner are available on the Internet (http:// www.automation.siemens.com/partner/). A guide to the technical documentation provided for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal). The online catalog and order system is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/ automation/mall). Training center Siemens offers various courses to get you started with the S7-300 and the SIMATIC S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in Nuremberg (ZIP code: 90327). Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain). S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 255 Service & support C.1 Service & support 256 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Glossary AS --> Automation system Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller which consists at least of one CPU, various I/O modules, and operating and monitoring devices. Backplane bus The backplane bus is a serial data bus through which the modules communicate with one another and through which they are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection between the modules is created by the bus connector. The --> I/O bus is a component of the backplane bus. Backplane bus active Backplane bus of the distributed I/O system --> ET 200M, which is made of active bus modules. This is the prerequisite for a configuration with which "inserting and removing" is permitted during operation. Baud rate The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred. It indicates the number of bits transferred per second (baud rate = bit rate). With ET 200 baud rates of 9.6 kBaud up to 12 MBaud are possible. Bus Transmission path with two defined ends, shared by all interconnected nodes. With ET 200 the bus is a two-wire line or a fiber-optic cable. Bus user Device which can send, receive and amplify signals via the bus, for example; DP master, DP slave, RS485 Repeater, active star coupler. CELENEC European Committee for Electrical Standards S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 257 Glossary CiR CiR (Configuration in RUN) stands for system modification in RUN. System modification in RUN by means of CiR allows the configuration of units of an active system with distributed I/ O. Process execution is interrupted for the duration of a brief, assignable period. The process inputs retain their last value during this time period. Client A client can request a service from a --> server. A client can, for example, be a program, a central module (CPU) or a station (e.g. PC). The client and server can exchange data via PROFIBUS DP by means of master-slave process, for example. A separate transfer channel can be assigned to each client to coordinate data exchange between several clients and the server, for example. Configuration Assigning modules to subracks / slots and addresses. A distinction is made between actual configuration (= actual inserted modules) and calculated configuration. You stipulate the calculated configuration with the help of STEP 7, COM PROFIBUS. The operating system can thus detect any incorrect assembly at startup. Configuring (initialize, assign parameters to) Included in parameterization is the setting of the behavior of a module or a --> field device by parameters. CPU Central processing unit = CPU of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic unit, memory, operating system, and interface for programming device. Diagnostic interrupt Modules which support diagnostics interrupts report system errors detected to the central CPU. In SIMATIC S7/M7: With the detection or disappearance of an error (e.g. wire break), the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt provided this interrupt is enabled. The --> CPU interrupts the processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt module (OB82). In SIMATIC S5: The diagnostic interrupt is reproduced within the device-related --> diagnostics. It can detect errors, like for example, wire breaks, by means of the cyclic querying of the diagnostics bit in the device-related diagnostics. Diagnostics The detection, localization, classification, visualization and further evaluation of errors, disturbances and messages. 258 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Glossary Diagnostics offers monitoring functions that automatically run while the system is in operation. This hence increases the availability of systems by reducing the installation and down times. Diagnostics buffer The diagnostics buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which diagnostics events can be stored in the order of occurrence. Distributed I/Os Represent I/O units which are installed at distributed locations at a greater distance to the CPU, instead of being implemented in the central rack. Examples: ET 200M, ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U DP/AS-I Link S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface further DP slaves by Siemens or other manufacturers The distributed I/Os are connected via --> PROFIBUS-DP with the --> DP master. DP address Each bus node must be assigned a unique DP address for PROFIBUS DP. PC/PG or the ET 200 hand-helds have the DP address "0". DP-Master and DP slaves have a DP address from the range 1 to 125. DP master A master that complies with the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard is known as a DP master. DP slave A slave running on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS DP protocol in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave. DP standard The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Dynamic parameters In contrast to static parameters, dynamic parameters of modules can be changed dynamically by the user program. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 259 Glossary Electrically isolated Electrically isolated I/O modules are isolated from the reference potentials of the control and load circuit by means of optocoupler, relay contact or transformer circuits. I/O circuits can be interconnected with a root circuit. Error handling via OB If the operating system detects a specific error (e.g. access fault with STEP 7), it calls up the respective --> organization block (error OB) for this case, in which the further behavior --> of the CPU can be established. ET 200 The distributed I/O system ET 200 with PROFIBUS DP protocol is a bus system for interconnecting distributed I/O with a CPU or for interconnecting adequate DP master. ET 200 features high-speed reaction times as the system only transfers a low data volume (bytes). ET 200 is based on the standard EN 50170, Volume 2, --> PROFIBUS. ET 200 works in accordance with the master slave principle. DP-Masters can, for example, be the master connection IM 308-C or the CPU 315-2 DP. DP slaves can be distributed I/Os ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200M, ET 200U or DP slaves by Siemens or other manufacturers. Fault indication The fault indication is one of the possible reactions of the operating system to a --> runtime error. The other reaction possibilities are: Error reaction in the user program, STOP state of the CPU or of IM 153-1. Fault reaction Reaction to a runtime error. The operating system can react in the following ways: Put the programmable controller in the STOP state, call up a --> organization block, whereby the user can program a reaction, or display an error. Field This can be an area of the plant outside the control room where measured values can be obtained through communication or manipulated values can be sent to actuators. Or part of a message, e.g. address field or command field, that is dedicated to a particular function. The dimensions or other regulations for the interpretation of each field are part of the protocol specification. Field device A transducer, that is located on the field and exchanges communication data with the central system. 260 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Glossary Field device, intelligent (smart device) A field device with more complex functionality, which includes a microprocessor and the functions of which can be set via a respective --> parameter assignment toll by the control room. FM FM Approvals, American certification organization for products frequency shift keying (FSK) is a data modulation technique that is suitable for the data transport via normal lines. Two audio frequencies are used for this, in order to code the binary "0" and "1" in the frequency range 300 - 3000 Hz. With HART protocol the FSK signal is transmitted via a current loop. FSK Frequency Shift Keying Frequency shift keying Ground The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point. Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation. One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground. Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur. Ground The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point. Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation. One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground. Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur. Ground The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point. Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation. One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 261 Glossary Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur. HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. HART is a registered trademark of the --> HART Communication Foundation. HART analog modules Analog modules which, in addition to their analog value, can carry out --> HART communication. HART analog modules can be used as --> HART interfaces for HART field devices. HART commands The HART field device works as a slave and is controlled by the master by means of HART commands. The master sets the --> HART parameters or requests data in the form of --> HART responses. HART communication Transmitting data between a master (e.g. HART analog module) and a slave (--> HART field device) via the --> HART protocol. HART Communication Foundation The HART Communication Foundation (HCF) was founded in 1993 in order to market and further develop the HART protocol. The HCF is an establishment that is not focused on profits and it is financed by its members. HART field device Smart device with additional HART-compatible functionality to enable interpretation of the HART communication functions. HART hand-held The HART hand-held includes the original parameter assignment tool by Fisher-Rosemount Ltd. for --> HART field devices, which is directly linked to its connections. The --> HART parameters are set using the HART hand-held. 262 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Glossary HART interface Part of a system with which a --> HART field device can be connected. The HART interface represents the master for the field device. With reference to the system, the HART interface however is a slave that can supply the system via various masters. A master represents, e.g. the --> HART parameter assignment tool. The programmable controller is itself a different master. HART parameter The HART parameters call the configurable features of --> HART field devices, which can be changed via the --> HART protocol. The setting takes place via a --> HART parameter assignment tool. HART parameter assignment tool The HART parameter assignment tool is used to comfortably set the --> HART parameters. It can be a --> HART hand-held or a parameter assignment tool that is integrated in the system, e.g. SIMATIC SIPROM. HART protocol The HART protocol is the industry standard for expanded communication with --> HART field devices. It includes the --> HART commands and the --> HART responses. HART responses The HART field devices transmits data upon the request of the master. These data represent measurement results, manipulated values or the values of HART parameters. A HART response always includes a status information, the --> HART status byte. HART signal Analog signal on a current loop from 4 - 20 mA, where the aid of the --> FSK procedure, the sinus waves for the --> HART protocol, 1200 Hz for the binary "1" and 2200 Hz for the binary "0" can be modulated. HART status byte The status information that consists of the 1st and 2nd status byte of the --> HART response and with which the HART field device offers information via the --> HART communication, the receipt of the --> HART command and the device status. HART transfer area Area of data records that are established for writing HART commands and reading HART responses with the HART analog modules. The HART transfer area consists of records. Each --> client is assigned its own range of data records, with which the --> server can exchange data with the client. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 263 Glossary HCF --A HART Communication Foundation I/O bus Component of the --> S7-300 backplane bus in the --> programmable controller system, optimized at the fast exchange of signals between the IM 153 and the signal modules. The I/ O bus is used to transfer process data, such as digital input signals of a signal module and system data, such as the default parameter records of a signal module. Interrupt The operating system of the --> CPU recognizes 10 different priority classes that regulate the editing of the user program. These priority classes include interrupts (e.g. hardware interrupts). When an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls an assigned OB in which the user can program the desired reaction. KEMA Certification office for products Load mains device Power supply to the signal / function modules and the process I/O connected to them. Master class 1 --> Master that carries out the user data traffic and with which the configuration and diagnostics of the distributed I/Os takes place. Master class 2 --> Master for controlling / installing and configuration tasks, e.g. configuring and diagnostics of the field devices that are connected to the distribution I/Os. Master slave procedure Bus access method where only one node is DP master, and all other nodes are DP slaves. Masters A master station which is in possession of the token can send data to other nodes and request data from those (= active node.) DP-Masters can, for example, be the master connection IM 308-C or the CPU 315-2 DP. 264 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Glossary Measuring-point tag Unique identifier for the measuring point, consisting of 8 characters. It is saved in the --> HART field device and can be changed and read off via the --> HART command. modem A modem (modulator / demodulator) is a device that converts binary digital signals into --> FSK signals and vice-versa. A modem doesnt code data, it offers a conversion of the physical form of the signals. Module parameters Module parameters are values using which the behavior of the module can be modified. We distinguish between static and dynamic module parameters. Monodrop In a monodrop communication system a maximum of two devices are linked to the same transmission path, e.g. channel of the HART analog module and --> HART field device. The --> HART protocol and the analog signal can be used simultaneously with this procedure. (By contrast, a communication system with more than two devices has the multidrop feature) Non-isolated The reference potentials of non-isolated I/O modules and of the control and load circuit are interconnected electrically. OB --> organization block organization blocks form the interface between the operating system of the S7-CPU and the user program. The sequence of processing the user program is established in the organization blocks. Parameter assignment tool A SW tool using which the parameters e.g. of an --> intelligent field device can be set. Potentially explosive atmosphere This is an area in which there is an explosion hazard or where due to local and operating conditions a dangerous explosive atmosphere can occur. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 265 Glossary Primary variable Variable for the master measured value of a HART analog input, for example, pressure. The HART field devices also support the implementation of other measuring processes, for example temperature measurements, and save the results to the second, third, or fourth variable and so forth. With a HART analog output the primary variable includes the manipulated variable. Process image Special memory area of the automation system. At the start of the cyclic program the signal states of the input modules are transferred to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclic program the process image of the outputs is transferred as a signal state to the output modules. Process interrupt A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-capable S7-300 modules due to a certain event in the process. Process interrupts are reported to the central CPU. The assigned organization block is then processed according to the priority of this interrupt. In SIMATIC S7/M7: The range is defined by parameterization of an upper and a lower limit. The module triggers a process interrupt if the process signal of an analog signal module such as the temperature is out of this working range, provided limit value interrupts are enabled. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class in order to execute process interrupt OB 40. In SIMATIC S5: The process interrupt is mapped within the device-specific diagnostics function. You can identify errors such as violation of limits by means of cyclic polling of the diagnostics bits in the device-specific diagnostics data. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS. This is an international process and fieldbus standard as defined in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Specifies the functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics of a serial bit stream field bus system. PROFIBUS is a bus system that connects PROFIBUS compatible automation systems and field devices on a cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= Distributed Peripherals), FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological Functions). PTB Physical Technical Federal Organization, Certification Office for Products Reaction time The reaction time is the average time that elapses between the changing of an input and the associated changing of an output. 266 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Glossary Reference potential Reference potential for the evaluation / measuring of the voltages of participating circuits. Runtime error Error that occurs during the editing of the user program in the --> programmable controller (also no in the process). S7-300 backplane bus Backplane bus for the S7-300 system. The same backplane bus can also be used for the distributed I/O system --> ET 200M. There the use of the active backplane bus is also possible (--> backplane bus, active) Server A server provides a service upon request. A server can, for example, be a program, a module or a station (e.g. PC). The data exchange between the --> A client and server can, for example, take place via PROFIBUS-DP in the --> master slave procedure. SFC --> system function Signal module Signal modules form the interface between the process and the automation system. There are digital input and output modules as well as analog input and output modules. Slave A slave can only exchange data with the master upon request from the same. SM --> signal module Static parameters Unlike dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the user program. You can only modify these parameters in STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS. Structure, central In a centralized configuration, the process I/O devices and central module are located in the same rack or in expansion units in the same or a neighboring cabinet. S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 267 Glossary Structure, distributed The process I/O of a distributed configuration is not installed directly alongside with the CPU in the same rack or in the same/adjacent cabinet. Distributed I/Os are installed at remote locations and interconnected via communication bus system. Substitute value Substitute values are values which are output by faulty signal output modules to the process, or used to substitute a process value of a faulty signal input module in the user program. The substitute values can be set by the user (for example, retain old values) System diagnostics System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and the report of errors that occur within the programmable controller. Examples for such errors are: Program errors or failure of modules. System errors can be displayed with LED displays or in the STEP 7. System function A system function is a function integrated in the operating system of the --> CPU which upon request can be called up in the STEP 7 user program. Terminating resistor power adaptation resistor connected to the bus cable. Always required at the end of cables or segments. The ET 200 bus connectors are equipped with switched terminating resistors. Timeout If an expected event does not occur within a specified time, this time is known as a "timeout". In the --> HART protocol there is a timeout for the response of a slave to a message from the master and for the pause after each transaction. Transducer Sensor, measuring transducer, actuator or final control element. A transducer can be implemented by means of a smart device. User data User data is exchanged between a central module and signal module, function module and communication modules via the process image or via direct access. User data could be: digital and analog input/output signals from signal modules, control and status information from function modules. 268 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Index " "Intrinsic safety" terminals, 32 2 2-wire transducer connecting, 115 Ranges of measurement, 150 4 4-wire transducer connecting, 115 Measuring ranges, 172 Ranges of measurement, 150 A ADU error, (See Causes of error and remedies) Analog digital conversion, 119 analog input module Conversion time, 118 Cycle time, 119 electrically isolated, 104 Parameterization, 120 Analog input module Diagnostic data records, 132 Diagnostics, 124 Interrupt, 128 Operating state of the CPU, influence, 130 Range of values, 131 Supply voltage, influence, 130 Analog input, measurement range, 87 analog output module electrically isolated, 117 Analog output module Conversion time, 119 Cycle time, 119 Diagnostic data records, 132 Diagnostics, 124 Interrupt, 128 Operating state of the CPU, influence, 130 Parameterization, 120 Range of values, 131 Response time, 120 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Supply voltage, influence, 130 Transient recovery time, 120 Analog signal, line, 111, 117 Analog value, 87 Analog value representation, 87 Climatic temperature range, 92 Climatic temperature range Ni 100, 93 Current measuring range, 89 Current output ranges, 102 Resistance sensor, 90 Standard temperature range Ni 100, 92 Temperature range encoder types, 94 Temperature range standard, 91 Voltage measuring range, 89 Approval, 11 ATEX, 252 CE, 249 Domestic, 253 FM, 251 FM approval, 12 Industry, 253 Marine, 253 Approvals, 4 ATEX approval, 252 Australia, marking, 252 Auxiliary voltage, (See Causes of error and remedies) B Backplane bus, 13 Basic knowledge, required, 3 Bit, noise-prone, 88 Block diagram SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 56 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 68 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA, 80 C cable bedding, 26 Cable routing in Ex systems, 24 Cables Cable routing in the cable bedding, 26 Marking, 26 Overview of requirements, 27 selection, 28 Shielding, 41 Types of cables, 29 269 Index Causes of error and remedies SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 63 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 75 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 75 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 126, 174 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA, 126 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 126 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA, 127 CE mark, 249 Certificates of conformity, 247 Changes since the previous edition of the manual, 3 Climatic, Ni 100, temperature range, 93 Climatic, temperature range, 92 compensation box, 114 Compensation box, 107 Compensation with thermocouples external, 114 internal, 114 Configuration tool HART, 166 IM 153-2, 167 IM 153-4, 167 Connect voltage transducer, 115 connecting 2-wire transducer, 115 4-wire transducer, 115 Ex I/O modules, 13 Line chamber, 14 Resistance thermometer, 111 Transducers, 103 Connecting loads/actuators, 117 Thermocouple, 106 Voltage sensor, 115 Connecting actuators, 117 Connecting loads, 117 Connection system, 102 Conversion time analog input module, 118 Analog output module, 119 CPU error, (See Causes of error and remedies) C-tick mark, 4 Current output range, analog value representation, 102 Cycle time analog input module, 119 Analog output module, 119 D Data record format Additional diagnostics, HART field devices, 198 270 Additional parameters for HART, 200 Diagnostics of the HART analog input, 192, 234 HART communication, 194, 236 Data record interface HART analog module, 189, 229 Parameter, 190, 231 Diagnostic data record Structure, analog modules, 132 Structure, digital modules, 84 Diagnostic interrupt, 129 Diagnostic messages, (See Causes of error and remedies) Diagnostics Analog modules general, 124 Data records, analog modules, 132 Data records, digital modules, 84 SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 62 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 75 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 75 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 125, 174, 209 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA, 125 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 125 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA, 127 Diagnostics of the HART analog input Data record DS0 / DS1, 192, 234 Data record DS1, 193, 235 Data record format, 192, 234 Digital module Diagnostic data records, 84 SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 53 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 77 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 66 Disposal, 4 Distribution of plants, 40 DM 370 dummy module combined use, 13 Installation information, 17 Documentation structure, 4 E Electrical isolation, 104 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 38 EPROM error, (See Causes of error and remedies) Equipment Shielding, 33 Equipotential bonding additional, 23 General, 21 in a building, 22 Lightning protection, 41 Main equipotential bonding, 23 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Index ET 200M Distribution, 40 Installation information for Ex I/O, 20 Ex area, (See Potentially explosive atmosphere) Ex I/O module connecting, 13 Design of ET 200M with an example, 20 replacing, 13 S7-300 installation information, 17 Safety standards, 250 Ex installation Zone 1, 47 Zone 2, 47 Ex lines Shielding, 36 Ex partition, 13, 20 Ex systems Guideline, 11 Wiring and cabling, 24 example HART configuration, 168 Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station, 43 F Field devices for HART, 163, 166, 198 FM approval, 251 Functional extra low voltage, safe, 12 Fuse blown, (See Causes of error and remedies) G Grounding Inactive metal parts, 37 intrinsically safe circuits, 35 Guideline Ex systems, 11 HART communication, 194, 236 H Hardware interrupt HART analog module, 175, 215 Hardware interrupt lost, (See Causes of error and remedies) HART, 163 application, 166 Configuration tool, 166 Diagnostic messages, 209 Example of commands, 165 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Example of parameters, 165 functions, 164 Group error, 197 Introduction, 163 Protocol error, 197 Status bytes, 166, 175 System environment, 166 User data format input, 202, 243 various diagnostic messages, 174 HART - modifying parameters, (See Causes of error and remedies) HART analog module Data record interface, 189, 229 Diagnostics, 174, 209 Example configuration, 168 HART measurement, 173 Installation, 169 Interrupt, 175, 215 Intrinsically safe installation, 169 Operating phase, 170 Reassign parameters, 170 Use in PROFIBUS DP, 162 User data, 189, 229 HART communication Command, data record, 195, 238 Data record format, 194, 236 Response, data record, 196, 239 HART data records Additional diagnostics for field devices, 198 Additional parameters, 200 Communications, 194, 236 Diagnostics, 192, 234 Input parameter, 190, 231 Output parameter, 191, 232 User data, output, 203, 244 HART group error, 197, (See Causes of error and remedies) HART operating phase Field devices, 170 User data, 170 HART protocol, 164 HART protocol error, 197 HART response Data record format, 196, 239 evaluating, 196, 239 HART signal FSK procedure, 164 Influence with transducers, 150 HART status bytes, 175, 197 271 Index I IEC 61131, 252 Incorrect parameters, (See Causes of error and remedies) Installation General information, 17 Racks, spacing, 18 Zone 1, 47 Zone 2, 47 Installation of the HART analog module, 169 interference voltage, 36 Interrupts Analog modules, 128 HART analog modules, 175, 215 SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 64 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 76 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 76 Intrinsic safety, 32 Intrinsically safe electrical circuit Cable routing requirements, 24 Grounding, 35 Intrinsically safe installation, (See module in question) L Lightning protection Equipotential bonding, 41 Lightning Protection, 39 external, 40 internal, 41 Lightning strike, measures, 45 Line Analog signals, 111, 117 Cable routing in the cable bedding, 26 Characteristic value of intrinsically safe circuits, 32 Marking, 26 Overview of requirements, 27 selection, 28 Type designations, 30 Line chamber, 14 Line shielding, 34 Load current circuit, 13 Load voltage missing, (See Causes of error and remedies) M Manual Changes, 3 Contents, 4 Purpose, 3 Marine approval, 253 Marking Cables, 26 Line, 26 Marking for Australia, 252 Measured value resolution, 88 Measured value table, 88 Measurement Resistance sensor, 111 Resistance thermometer, 111 Measurement of current, measuring ranges, overview, 89 measures to counteract overvoltage, 39 Measures Eliminating the risk of explosion, 46 Safety Measures, 45 to counteract, 36 with a lightning strike, 45 Measuring ranges HART analog input, 190, 231 HART analog output, 191, 232 Undershoot, (See Causes of error and remedies) Violation, (See Causes of error and remedies) Module not configured, (See Causes of error and remedies) O Operating state of the CPU, influence Analog modules, 130 SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 65 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 77 Order number 6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0, 176 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0, 215 6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0, 183 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0, 223 all at a glance, 3 Order Number 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0, 53 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0, 77 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0, 66 6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0, 146 6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0, 135 6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0, 154 Maintaining equipment, 50 272 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Index Overvoltage Protection, 42 Example gas compressor station, 43 in intrinsically safe circuits, 42 P parameter Additional parameters for HART, data record format, 200 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 73 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 73 SM 331; AI 4 x 4/0...20 mA, 123 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 123 Parameter HART data records, 190, 231 SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 60 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 171 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 121 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 173 Parameterization HART access rights, 171 Interrupt, 128 Partition, 13 Potentially explosive atmosphere Eliminating the risk of explosion, 46 Ex installation in zone 1, 47 Ex installation in zone 2, 47 Safety measures for mounting, 45 Power supply, 13 Process interrupt Analog modules, 129 PROFIBUS DP with HART analog modules, 162 R RAM error, (See Causes of error and remedies) Range of values, influence on output, 131 Ranges of measurement 2-wire transducer, 150 4-wire transducer, 150 Analog input, 87 Resistance measurement, 139 Voltage measurement, 139 Recycling, 4 Reference channel fault, (See Causes of error and remedies) Reference junction, 113 Replacing equipment, 50 Replacing Ex I/O modules, 13 Requirements Cables, 27 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Line, 27 terminals, 32 Resistance measurement SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 138 Resistance sensor Analog value representation, 90 Measurement, 111 Resistance thermometer, 111 Response time, analog output module, 120 S S7 Ex analog modules, 11, 87 S7 Ex digital modules, 11, 53 S7 Ex-HART analog modules, 11, 161 S7-300 Installation information for Ex I/O, 17 Wiring of the Ex I/O, 18 Safety, 250 Safety measures for mounting, 45 Safety standards Ex modules, 250 Service & support, 255 Shielding building, 40, 41 Cables, 41 Definition, 33 Equipment, 33 Ex lines, 36 Line, 34 Systems with optimal equipotential bonding, 34 Shielding of buildings, 41 Short-circuit to M, (See Causes of error and remedies) SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 53 Block diagram, 56 Causes of error and remedies, 63 Diagnostics, 62 Features, 53 Interrupts, 64 Intrinsically safe installation, 55 Parameter, 60 Parameterization, 59 technical specifications, 56 Wiring diagram, 55 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 77 Features, 78 Interrupts, 76 Intrinsically safe installation, 79 technical specifications, 80 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA Block diagram, 68 Wiring diagram, 67 273 Index SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA Features, 66 Interrupts, 76 Intrinsically safe installation, 67 parameter, 73 Parameterization, 72 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA Block diagram, 80 Parameter, 73 Wiring diagram, 79 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA Causes of error and remedies, 75 Diagnostics, 75 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 66 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA Causes of error and remedies, 75 Diagnostics, 75 Technical specifications, 69 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 176, 215 Causes of error and remedies, 126, 174 Diagnostics, 125, 174, 209 Features, 176, 216 Parameter, 171 Technical specifications, 179, 219 Wiring diagram, 178, 218 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 146 Features, 146 Intrinsically safe installation, 148 Parameter, 123 technical specifications, 151 Wire-break monitoring, 150 Wiring diagram, 148 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA Causes of error and remedies, 126 Diagnostics, 125 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 135 Features, 135 Intrinsically safe installation, 137 Thermocouples, 139 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD Causes of error and remedies, 126 Diagnostics, 125 Parameter, 121 Resistance measurement, 138 technical specifications, 140 Wire-break monitoring, 139 Wiring diagram, 136 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 183, 223 Features, 183, 223 Parameter, 173 Technical specifications, 186, 226 274 Wire break check, 184, 224 Wiring diagram, 185, 225 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 154 Features, 154 Intrinsically safe installation, 155 Parameter, 123 technical specifications, 157 Wiring diagram, 155 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA Causes of error and remedies, 127 Diagnostics, 127 Spacing on subracks, 18 Sparks capable of causing ignition, 46 Standard Ni 100 temperature range, 92 Standard, temperature range, 91 Standards, 4 Supply voltage, influence Analog modules, 130 SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 65 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 77 T technical specifications SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 56 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 80 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 151 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 140 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 157 Technical specifications SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 69 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 179, 219 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 186, 226 Temperature ranges, analog value representation Climatic, 92 Climatic, Ni 100, 93 Encoder types, 94 Standard, 91 Standard Ni 100, 92 Thermocouple Compensation at terminals, 109 Compensation box, 107 Compensation with RTD, 110 external compensation, 106, 110, 114 General information, 112 Internal compensation, 106, 111, 114 operating principle, 113 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 139 Wiring options, 106 Thread measure, minimum, 12 Time monitoring, (See Causes of error and remedies) Training center, 255 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 Index Transducers connecting, 103 insulated, 104 non-insulated, 105 Transient recovery time, analog output module, 120 Type designations Lines, harmonized standards, 30 Telecommunication cables and lines, 31 Types of protection, 47 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 155 U Use combined, 13 In industry, 253 in residential areas, 253 S7 Ex modules, 11 User data HART analog input, 202, 243 HART analog module, 189, 229 HART analog output, 203, 244 V Validity of the manual, 3 Voltage measurement Measuring ranges, overview, 89 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 139 W Watchdog, (See Causes of error and remedies) Wire break, (See Causes of error and remedies) Wire break check SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 177, 217 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 184, 224 Wire-break monitoring SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 150 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 139 SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 156 Wiring ET 200M, 20 S7-300, 18 Wiring diagram SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 55 SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA, 79 SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 67 SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 178, 218 SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 148 SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 136 SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 185, 225 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 275 Index 276 S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12